Panasonic Digital Camera 75 85 95 MXP User Manual

User Manual  
Software version F5  
D13947.01  
June 2006  
This document is not to be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Manual  
eCos  
eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System.  
Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Red Hat, Inc.  
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 John Dallaway  
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Nick Garnett  
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Jonathan Larmour Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Andrew Lunn Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Gary  
Thomas Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Bart Veer  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
(c) UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.  
All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone  
and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System  
Laboratories, Inc.  
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. * All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000 Brian Somers <[email protected]>  
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. * All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Niklas Hallqvist. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988 Stephen Deering.  
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Stephen Deering of Stanford University.  
Portions of eCos code are distributed under several BSD style licenses. Other portions of eCos code are distributed under  
the terms of the GNU General Public License with a non-copyleft exception which allows static links to non-copyleft  
programs.  
ExPat XML Parser:  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper  
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.  
The ExPat XML parser is distributed under the terms of the ExPat License which is a MIT/X Consortium style open  
source license  
ICU  
ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 Copyright (c) 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All rights  
reserved.  
ICU is distributed under the terms of the ICU license, which is a MIT/X Consortium style license.  
OpenSSL  
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  
(http://www.openssl.org/)"  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) * All rights reserved.  
OpenSSL is distributed under the terms of the OpenSSL and SSLeay licenses, which are both BSD style open source  
licenses.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
snprintf  
Copyright 1999, Mark Martinec. [email protected] All rights reserved  
Snprintf is distributed under the terms of the snprintf license, which is a Frontier Artistic style open source license.  
A standard copy of snprintf can be located at the author’s web site: http://www.ijs.si/software/snprintf/  
xSupplicant (wpa_supplicant) 802.1x  
Copyright (c) 2002-2005, Jouni Malinen [email protected]  
xSupplicant is distributed under the terms of the xSupplicant license, which is a BSD style open source license.  
Disclaimer  
The information in this document is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to  
change without prior notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by TANDBERG. The  
information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable; however TANDBERG  
assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this  
document, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its  
use. No license is granted under any patents or patent rights of TANDBERG.  
This document was written by the Research and Development Department of TANDBERG,  
Norway. We are committed to maintain a high level of quality in all our documentation. Towards  
this effort, we welcome you to Contact us with comments and suggestions regarding the content  
and structure of this document.  
Patent information  
TANDBERG technology described in this manual is protected by one or more of the following  
U.S. Patent No. 5,584,077 - 5,838,664 - 5,600,646 - 7,010,119 - 7,034,860 and other patents are  
pending in the United States and/or other countries.  
COPYRIGHT © 2005–2006, TANDBERG  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Manual  
Environmental Issues  
Thank you for buying a product which contributes to a reduction in pollution, and thereby helps  
save the environment. Our products reduce the need for travel and transport and thereby reduce  
pollution. Our products have either none or few consumable parts (chemicals, toner, gas, paper).  
Our products are low energy consuming products.  
TANDBERG’s Environmental Policy  
Environmental stewardship is important to TANDBERG’s culture. As a global company with  
strong corporate values, TANDBERG is committed to being an environmental leader and  
embracing technologies that help companies, individuals and communities creatively address  
environmental challenges.  
TANDBERG’s environmental objectives are to:  
Develop products that reduce energy consumption, CO2 emissions, and traffic congestion  
Provide products and services that improve quality of life for our customers  
Produce products that can be recycled or disposed of safely at the end of product life  
Comply with all relevant environmental legislation.  
European Environmental Directives  
As a manufacturer of electrical and electronic equipment TANDBERG is responsible for  
compliance with the requirements in the European Directives 2002/96/EC (WEEE) and  
2002/95/EC (RoHS).  
The primary aim of the WEEE Directive and RoHS Directive is to reduce the impact of disposal of  
electrical and electronic equipment at end-of-life. The WEEE Directive aims to reduce the amount  
of WEEE sent for disposal to landfill or incineration by requiring producers to arrange for  
collection and recycling. The RoHS Directive bans the use of certain heavy metals and  
brominates flame retardants to reduce the environmental impact of WEEE which is land filled or  
incinerated.  
TANDBERG has implemented necessary process changes to comply with the European RoHS  
Directive (2002/95/EC) and the European WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC).  
Waste Handling  
In order to avoid the dissemination of hazardous substances in our  
environment and to diminish the pressure on natural resources, we  
encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems in your area.  
Those systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of your end  
of life equipment in a sound way.  
TANDBERG products put on the market after August 2005 are  
marked with a crossed-out wheelie bin symbol that invites you to use  
those take-back systems.  
Please contact your local supplier, the regional waste administration or  
http://www.tandberg.net/recycling if you need more information on the collection and recycling  
system in your area.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Information for Recyclers  
As part of compliance with the European WEEE Directive, TANDBERG provides recycling  
information on request for all types of new equipment put on the market in Europe after August  
13th 2005.  
Please contact TANDBERG at [email protected] and provide the following details for the  
product for which you would like to receive recycling information:  
Model number of TANDBERG product  
Your company’s name  
Contact name  
Address  
Telephone number  
E-mail address  
Digital User Guides  
TANDBERG is pleased to announce that we have replaced the printed versions of our User  
Guides with a digital CD version. Instead of a range of different user manuals, there is now one  
CD – which can be used with all TANDBERG products – in a variety of languages. The  
environmental benefits of this are significant. The CDs are recyclable and the savings on paper  
are huge. A simple web-based search feature helps you directly access the information you need.  
In addition, the TANDBERG video systems now have an intuitive on-screen help function, which  
provides a range of useful features and tips. The contents of the CD can still be printed locally,  
whenever needed.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Manual  
Operator Safety Summary  
Operator Safety Summary  
For your protection please read these safety instructions completely before you connect the  
equipment to the power source. Carefully observe all warnings, precautions and instructions both  
on the apparatus and in these operating instructions.  
Keep this manual for future reference.  
Water and Moisture  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Do not operate the apparatus under or near water - for example near a bathtub, kitchen sink,  
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, near a swimming pool or in other areas with high humidity.  
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is specifically  
designed for wet locations.  
Do not touch the product with wet hands.  
Cleaning  
ƒ
Unplug the apparatus from communication lines, mains power-outlet or any power source  
before cleaning or polishing. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a lint-free  
cloth lightly moistened with water for cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.  
Unplug the apparatus from communication lines before cleaning or polishing. Do not use  
liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a lint-free cloth lightly moistened with water for  
cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.  
ƒ
Ventilation  
ƒ
Do not block any of the ventilation openings of the apparatus. Never cover the slots and  
openings with a cloth or other material. Never install the apparatus near heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
Do not place the product in direct sunlight or close to a surface directly heated by the sun.  
ƒ
Lightning  
Never use this apparatus, or connect/disconnect communication cables or power cables  
during lightning storms.  
ƒ
Dust  
ƒ
Do not operate the apparatus in areas with high concentration of dust  
Vibration  
ƒ
Do not operate the apparatus in areas with vibration or place it on an unstable surface.  
Power connection and Hazardous voltage  
ƒ
The product may have hazardous voltage inside. Never attempt to open this product, or any  
peripherals connected to the product, where this action requires a tool.  
This product should always be powered from an earthed power outlet.  
Never connect attached power supply cord to other products.  
In case any parts of the product has visual damage never attempt to connect mains power, or  
any other power source, before consulting service personnel  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The plug connecting the power cord to the product/power supply serves as the main  
disconnect device for this equipment. The power cord must always be easily accessible.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
ƒ
Route the power cord so as to avoid it being walked on or pinched by items placed upon or  
against it. Pay particular attention to the plugs, receptacles and the point where the cord exits  
from the apparatus.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Do not tug the power cord  
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician.  
Never install cables, or any peripherals, without first unplugging the device from it's power  
source.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
*Always use the power supply (AC-DC adapter) provided with this product.  
*Replace only with power supply (AC-DC adapter) specified by TANDBERG.  
*Never connect attached power supply (AC-DC adapter) to other products.  
Servicing  
ƒ
ƒ
Do not attempt to service the apparatus yourself as opening or removing covers may expose  
you to dangerous voltages or other hazards, and will void the warranty. Refer all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
Unplug the apparatus from it's power source and refer servicing to qualified personnel under  
the following conditions:  
- If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.  
- If liquid has been spilled into the apparatus.  
- If objects have fallen into the apparatus.  
- If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture  
- If the apparatus has been subjected to excessive shock by being dropped.  
- If the cabinet has been damaged.  
- If the apparatus seems to be overheated.  
- If the apparatus emits smoke or abnormal odor.  
- If the apparatus fails to operate in accordance with the operating instructions  
Accessories  
ƒ
Use only accessories specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.  
Communication lines  
ƒ
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been  
disconnected at the network interface.  
ƒ
ƒ
Do not use communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord (ISDN  
cables).  
* Applies to the following products: T150 MXP, T550 MXP, T770 MXP, T880 MXP, T990 MXP, T1500 MXP, T1000 MXP,  
T2000 MXP, T3000 MXP Profile, Tandberg Codec 3000 MXP, Tandberg Tactical MXP, Edge 75/85/95 MXP.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Manual  
Contact us  
If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please see the Online Support section at  
It is also possible to send a fax or mail to the attention of:  
Product and Sales Support  
TANDBERG  
P.O. Box 92  
1325 Lysaker  
Norway  
Tel: +47 67 125 125  
Fax: +47 67 125 234  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Table of Contents  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Manual  
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239) ............................................................................ 77  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Manual  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Introduction  
The TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP incorporates the features and functions of larger systems  
in a portable high performance set top unit. This creates a collaborative meeting environment for  
medium to small-sized meeting rooms.  
TANDBERG Precision HD Camera  
To provide customers with optimal video processing and picture perfect quality, TANDBERG has  
created the TANDBERG Precision HD Camera custom-designed for videoconferencing. Whether  
using high definition for detail or a 3G device for mobility, the optimal definition ensures the  
highest picture quality possible, letting video users enjoy the best resolution at the bandwidth  
available and for their situation.  
NEW Precision High Definition Camera for selected TANDBERG MXP systems  
TANDBERG Precision HD Camera:  
High Resolution, 1280x720p@30fps  
High quality colors and dynamic range  
Low noise in low light conditions  
70° wide angle lens with 7x zoom  
High quality image sharpness  
Fully Automatic  
Users can dial in from a video system outside the enterprise without being registered to a  
gatekeeper  
The feature enhancement enables dialing through a TANDBERG Gatekeeper without being  
registered to it. This makes it easy to call in from a video system outside the enterprise.  
To be able to make such a call, this feature must be enabled in your gatekeeper or border  
controller, and the called endpoint must be registered with the enterprise gatekeeper or border  
controller.  
NEW Users can dial in from a video system outside the enterprise without being  
registered to a gatekeeper, i.e. dialing from/using a global IP address.  
SIP Services  
SIP Services enables the user to use the features Add Call and Transfer. To get the SIP Services  
available you select SIP as your Net when you make a call. You must have a SIP registrar/VoIP  
solution that supports this.  
NEW Enhanced SIP services to enable rich services like call transfer and suspend.  
Enables integration into Video and Voice over IP (V2oIP) solutions from  
Microsoft, Nortel and Avaya.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Controllable Bandwidth  
When setting up a call with H.323 the bandwidth can be controlled by the user by setting the  
Presentation Rate.  
The Presentation Rate is expressed in percent of the Call Rate and shall reflect the H.323  
Presentation Rate settings of the sender.  
Graphical View of the Audio Streams  
The graphical view gives a visual presentation of the active audio streams for the input sources  
and the output sources.  
In addition the user can play a Test Tone for each audio input and output source.  
Presets and Extension Numbers  
While in a call, the user presses a number key on remote control to:  
add another call  
dial extension numbers  
use camera presets  
The system can be configured to act automatic or to give the user a choice of what to do every  
time the user presses a number key on the remote control, when in a call.  
Audio Quality  
High-performance audio provides a richer, more complete visual communication experience. The  
MPEG4 AAC-LD standard is used to provide true standards-based CD-quality, stereo audio.  
Users can record and send stereo audio from stereo presentation and playback sources using  
PCs, DVDs and VCRs using the proper cables.  
Disturbance from GSM mobile phones and Blackberry devices is eliminated by a noise filter.  
Video Quality  
Features which ensure high quality video include:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Precision HD Camera, 1280x720 progressive scan @ 30fps  
Support for H.264 in MultiSite, Dual Video and encryption.  
SXGA input and 2 x XGA, up to WXGA or 720p output through DVI-I (analog or digital).  
H.264 video compression up to 2Mbps.  
Support for native 16:9 and Wide XGA monitors (1280x768)  
NEW High Definition (HD) Support on TANDBERG MXP systems with a DVI input and  
output  
Network  
The system supports video meetings via both IP and ISDN networks. The bandwidth capabilities  
are:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
up to 2Mbps* per call  
up to 2.3Mbps* total for a MultiSite conference.  
H320, H323 and SIP support, for both point-to-point and MultiSite*.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
TF  
If channels are dropped during a video meeting session, downspeeding automatically maintains  
connections without interruption.  
Security  
TF  
Secure Conference provides embedded encryption for both Point-to-Point and MultiSite call and  
ensures both privacy and security.  
The system is delivered with integrated Expressway™ firewall traversal technology. When used  
together with a TANDBERG Border Controller it enables:  
ƒ
ƒ
Secure and seamless traversal of ANY firewall.  
No missing features when traversing the firewall – works with H.264, MPEG4 audio,  
encryption.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
H.460.18 and H.460.19 ITU Standardized firewall traversal, support.  
Outside systems, such as home offices, to be part of the enterprise dial plan.  
Dialing to systems by numbers or URI, e.g. [email protected].  
NEW Highest level of embedded encryption as well as H.235 and IEEE 802.1x  
authentication for security  
MultiSite*  
TF  
The embedded MultiSite functionality can cater for up to 4 video sites and 3 audio sites and  
supports screen layouts such as VoiceSwitched, AutoSplit, 4 Split and 5+1 Split. The optional  
embedded MultiSite functionality supports any combination of ISDN and IP participants in a  
conference (up to the total).  
Superior quality and reliability in MultiSite calls is ensured by the systems support for:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
DuoVideo/H.239 to provide for presenting full PC resolution information  
H235, 802.1x and AES and DES encryption to provide security  
H.264 video algorithm to provide the best video at all bandwidths  
TF  
Rate matching to support different call rates for all sites in a MultiSite  
TF  
Transcoding to support different protocols for all sites in a MultiSite.  
The TANDBERG video communication system can also be used as an audio telephone bridge  
(assuming ISDN connection(s)).  
Presentations  
The Natural Presenter Package* (NPP) makes it possible to include PC presentations in  
videoconferences and comprises:  
TF  
ƒ
ƒ
Digital Clarity which transmits exceptionally high-quality, native resolution video.  
TF  
Duo Video /H.239 which allows participants at the far end to simultaneously watch a  
presenter on one screen and a live PC presentation in native resolution on a second  
monitor (up to SXGA on compatible monitors).  
TF  
ƒ
ƒ
PC Presenter which allows a PC connection via standard DVI/VGA cable supporting up  
to SXGA resolution.  
TF  
PC SoftPresenter which shows PC images via a LAN connection supporting XGA  
resolution.  
ƒ
ƒ
Auto Layout to automatically choose the best layout for the call.  
PC Zoom which allows the native resolution PC image to be zoomed in/out with the  
remote control to get SXGA resolution.  
Users can display video and presentations in the best layout based on the situation. Supported  
screen layouts are:  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Picture in Picture (PiP)  
Picture outside Picture (PoP)  
Side by Side  
User interfaces  
A web-interface to the codec provides:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System management, diagnostics and software uploads.  
Text chat/closed captioning.  
Unicast Streaming – which allows broadcasting of audio/video via an IP network to a  
single compatible client (RealMedia™ or Apple Quicktime™) or streaming server.  
The On-Screen Menu:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Provides an easy interface for first-time users with symbols and descriptions.  
Builds upon the familiar current interface.  
Enhanced language support with Asian and non-Latin character text input in the menu for  
local language system names  
ƒ
Simplified on-screen menu, Kiosk Mode, for special purposes  
The remote control has a simplified look and feel, an auto system wake-up when picked up, and  
large, easy-to-read keys.  
Interoperability  
The TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP is worldwide compatible with other ITU standards-based  
videoconferencing systems from many other vendors worldwide.  
* - optional feature. To check which options are installed, select Control Panel - Diagnostics - System Information in the  
menu.  
TF  
- TANDBERG First  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1.1 At a Glance  
TANDBERG Edge  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP is delivered with TANDBERG Precision HD Camera and  
TANDBERG HD Unit with foot stand, which give a high definition video quality and are optimized  
for video meetings.  
TANDBERG Precision HD Camera  
The Precision HD Camera is a high resolution quality color camera with a fast pan/tilt/zoom/focus  
action. It is controlled by the system’s remote control which operates pan, tilt, focus, zoom and  
backlight compensation. Up to fifteen camera positions can be pre-stored using Camera Presets.  
TANDBERG HD Unit with Foot Stand  
The TANDBERG HD Unit is the heart of the system. Its main task is the compression of outgoing  
video, audio and data, the transmission of this information to the far end and the decompression  
of the incoming information.  
Remote Control  
The remote control is used to control all functions of the system. If the screen saver is activated  
(black monitor), touching the remote control will automatically wake up the system. The remote  
control uses 4 AAA batteries. The system will tell you when batteries are running low. Change the  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
batteries at the back of the remote control. Please follow the guidelines on the packing material  
for handling and disposal instructions for the batteries.  
The reach of the remote control signal is 20 meters (65 ft). The remote control IR receiver is  
located on the camera. For users working in an open environment with multiple systems  
deployed, this can cause other systems to respond to your remote control. Use the little, white  
switch placed under the batteries to change the reach of the signal from 20 meters (65 ft) to 2  
meters (6.5 ft). This will prevent you from unintentionally controlling another video system, when  
you control your own system.  
Microphone  
The high quality table microphone is designed to be placed on a table during a video meeting. Up  
to two microphones can be connected. The ideal location for the microphone is on a flat surface  
at least 2m (6.5 ft) from the front of the system. The microphone cable should always point  
towards the system. The system will automatically equalize sound levels. Loud and soft voices  
are picked up and transmitted to the far end at approximately the same level.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1.2 Menu Structure  
The Menu is available for all users and contains all the functionality of the system. The Control  
Panel contains all the settings of the system. Making changes to the settings will change the  
behavior of the system. The menu structure is shown below.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Note that the system features and menu settings may vary depending on network selection  
and software package.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Installation  
Precautions:  
ƒ
ƒ
Never install communication wiring during a lightning storm.  
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is  
specifically designed for wet locations.  
ƒ
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has  
been disconnected at the network interface.  
ƒ
ƒ
Use caution when installing or modifying communication lines.  
Avoid using communication equipment (other than a cordless type) during an electrical  
storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.  
Do not use the communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
Always connect the product to an earthed socket outlet.  
The socket outlet shall be installed near to the equipment and shall be easily accessible.  
Never install cables without first switching the power OFF.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
1TR6 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications  
network. This network type is only to be used behind a PABX.  
This product complies with directives: LVD 73/23/EC, EMC 89/366/EEC, R&TTE 99/5/EEC  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
2.1 Unpacking and Mounting  
The TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP consists of the following items:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
TANDBERG Precision HD Camera  
TANDBERG HD Unit with foot stand  
Table Microphone  
Remote Control  
Batteries  
User Manual on CD  
Camera cable, LAN cable, ISDN cable, PC cable, microphone cable, monitor cable and  
power cable.  
ƒ
Registration card  
Place the system centrally, on top of the monitor, close to the front and ensure it is stable.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2.2 Connecting Cables  
Connecting cables at TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Connect the cables in accordance to the description in the picture above.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
2.3 Monitor Configuration  
Power on  
Power on the monitor and use the monitor remote control to select the Audio/Video input used  
(refer to the monitor manual). If using S-video from the system, remember to select S-Video input  
to avoid a black and white picture.  
Select Audio/Video input on monitor  
Selection of Audio/Video input used is generally performed by pressing the 0/AV button on the  
monitor remote control several times. Please refer to the monitor user manual for further  
information.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2.4 System Configuration  
The system must be configured for each installation. Configuration settings can be made via the  
system menu.  
Navigate through the menu system using the arrow keys and OK. Remember to press the Save  
button on the bottom of each menu to save the changes. Press Cancel (x) to return to the  
previous Menu. See General Use for more information about how to use the menus and the  
remote control.  
General configuration:  
1. Open the General Settings menu  
Press OK/Menu to open the Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control Panel -  
General to open the General Settings menu.  
2. Language  
Press OK in the Language field and select the desired language from the list.  
3. System Name / International Name*  
Enter a name in the System Name field using the number keys on the remote control,  
in the same way as with a mobile or cellular phone. Hold down the # key for one  
second to switch back and forth from numbers to alpha characters.  
4. Auto Answer, Phone Book Settings, External Services Settings and  
Permissions  
These settings may be left unchanged if no special needs are required. See chapter  
General Settings for more information.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5. Screen Settings  
When using wide screen (16:9) monitors, set TV Monitor Format to Wide (16:9).  
TANDBERG also recommends setting Picture Layout to Picture outside Picture when  
using 16:9 monitors. Picture outside Picture provides a display layout optimized for  
wide screen monitors. The display layout may be changed at any time using the  
Layout button on the remote control.  
6. Software Options  
To activate options for the system, a new option key must be entered in the Software  
Options menu (see paperwork accompanying the system). The Presenter option key  
should be entered under “New Option Key”. Any bandwidth option key should be  
entered under “New Bandwidth Key”. For more information on these options, please  
contact your TANDBERG representative.  
7. Date and Time Settings  
Select your preferred Date and Time Settings.  
8. Save changes  
Remember to save any changes made in a menu by selecting the Save button on the  
menu line and pressing OK.  
Network configuration:  
1. Open the Network menu  
Press OK/Menu to open the Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control Panel -  
Network to open the Network menu.  
2. ISDN configuration  
Set the Network type to the desired network. Specify the settings for the selected  
network in the relevant menu. For details, follow the instructions in ISDN-BRI  
Settings. See also the examples in Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the  
Switched 56 network and in Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1  
network adapters.  
3. LAN configuration  
Select LAN Settings in the Network menu and specify the necessary LAN settings  
according to the instructions from your LAN administrator. For details, follow the  
instructions in LAN Settings. If there is an H.323 Gatekeeper present on your LAN,  
refer to H.323 Settings as well.  
4. Network Profiles  
Please refer to Network Profiles for details  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
5. Data Port  
Please refer to Data Port for details  
6. Save changes  
Remember to save any changes made in the menu by selecting the Save button on  
the Menu line and pressing OK.  
* The International Name field is only visible if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin  
character text input.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 General Use  
Wake up the system  
When the system is not in use, it is in standby mode and the screen(s) are black. Wake up the  
system by picking up the remote control. An incoming call or pressing any key on the remote  
control will also wake up the system.  
If the system does not respond:  
ƒ
ƒ
Make sure that the system is switched on by using the On/Off switch located at the rear  
of the Codec.  
Verify that your monitor is switched on. This is normally done by pushing the power  
button on the front of the monitor depending on monitor type.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.1 The Welcome Screen  
When the system is switched on, the welcome screen will be displayed. The welcome screen  
presents the menu and displays your main camera image in the background (display main  
camera is the default setting). The ISDN/IP numbers and the system name are displayed in the  
upper right corner. The ISDN Number and IP Number are the dial-in numbers of the system.  
The welcome screen provides you with the most important system information:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System Name  
Your ISDN Number  
Your IP Address or IP Number  
Indications of Missed Calls or Warnings if any  
It is possible to customize the text on the welcome screen. See Menu Settings for how to edit the  
welcome text.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.2 Using the Remote Control  
The system is controlled with a remote control. Think of the remote control as a mobile phone  
with number keys and call keys. Use the arrow keys and press OK to navigate through the  
menus. The system’s most commonly used functions are also accessible directly from the remote  
control. The Infra Red (IR) sensor for the remote control is located in front of the Camera. There  
is also a second IR-sensor located in the front of the Codec itself, which will be automatically  
enabled if the Camera is not connected.  
The remote control (TRC 3)  
1. Mic Off turns your microphone on and  
off, see Mic off.  
2. Arrow keys are used for navigation in  
the menu and for moving the camera*  
when the menu is hidden, see  
Navigation.  
3. Volume + and – adjusts the Codec  
volume only and not the monitor's  
volume, see Volume + and -.  
4. The Layout key toggles between full  
screen and different display layouts, see  
Layout.  
5. Cancel takes you back one step in the  
menu system. Use Cancel to delete  
characters in an input field, see  
Navigation. Press and hold the Cancel  
key for 1 second to close the menu.  
6. Press the Call key to place a call, see  
Make a Call.  
7. Camera presets define specific camera  
positions. Move the camera to the  
desired position and press and hold a  
number key for 1 second to save the  
current camera position to that number  
key. To activate a preset whilst in a call,  
simply press and release that number  
key, see Camera Presets.  
8. Snapshot takes a snapshot of your video  
only while you are in a call, see Take  
New Snapshot.  
9. The Presentation key switches to a  
predefined presentation source. If the  
Presentation key is held down for 1  
second then the Presentation video  
sources menu will appear, see  
Presentation Key.  
10. Press OK/Menu to show the menu and  
to select menu items, see Navigation.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
11. Use Zoom + and – to zoom the camera  
in and out.*  
12. Selfview displays your outgoing video.  
Press Selfview again to turn selfview off,  
see Selfview.  
13. Use the Phone Book to store and recall  
video contacts for easy placement of  
calls, see Phone Book.  
14. Use the red End Call key to end the  
current call. Pressing this key when not  
in a call will place the system in Standby  
mode, see End Call and Standby.  
15. Number/Letter keys function in the same  
manner as with a mobile or cellular  
phone, see Number and Letter keys.  
16. Press Touch tones when you are in a  
call and need to dial extension numbers  
etc. (instead of presets). Press the  
OK/Menu button to exit Touch Tones,  
see Touch tones.  
*This does not apply to all systems with small integrated cameras.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
The remote control (TRC 4)**:  
1. Change video source. If  
possible, you will start open a  
Dual Stream. Press the video  
source button again to stop  
the dual stream.  
2. Mic Off turns your microphone  
on and off, see Mic off.  
3. Arrow keys are used for  
navigation in the menu and for  
moving the camera* when the  
menu is hidden, see  
Navigation.  
4. Volume + and – adjusts the  
Codec volume only and not  
the monitor's volume, see  
Volume + and -.  
5. The Layout key toggles  
between full screen and  
different display layouts, see  
Layout.  
6. Cancel takes you back one  
step in the menu system. Use  
Cancel to delete characters in  
an input field, see Navigation.  
Press and hold the Cancel  
key for 1 second to close the  
menu.  
7. Press the Call key to place a  
call, see Make a Call.  
8. Number/Letter keys function  
in the same manner as with a  
mobile or cellular phone, see  
Number and Letter keys.  
Camera presets define  
specific camera positions.  
Move the camera to the  
desired position and press  
and hold a number key for 1  
second to save the current  
camera position to that  
number key. To activate a  
preset whilst in a call, simply  
press and release that  
number key, see Camera  
Presets.  
9. Press Preset + a number to  
activate a preset.  
10. Press the Services button to  
open the Services menu.  
11. The Presentation key  
switches to a predefined  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
presentation source. If the  
Presentation key is held down  
for 1 second then the  
Presentation video sources  
menu will appear, see  
Presentation Key.  
12. Press OK/Menu to show the  
menu and to select menu  
items, see Navigation.  
13. Use Zoom + and – to zoom  
the camera in and out.*  
14. Selfview displays your  
outgoing video. Press  
Selfview again to turn selfview  
off, see Selfview.  
15. Use the Phone Book to store  
and recall video contacts for  
easy placement of calls, see  
Phone Book.  
16. Use the red End Call key to  
end the current call. Pressing  
this key when not in a call will  
place the system in Standby  
mode, see End Call and  
Standby.  
17. Snapshot takes a snapshot of  
your video only while you are  
in a call, see Take New  
Snapshot.  
18. Press Touch tones when you  
are in a call and need to dial  
extension numbers etc.  
(instead of presets). Press the  
OK/Menu button to exit Touch  
Tones, see Touch tones.  
19. Pressing Far End turns Far  
End control on and off.  
20. Press the Help button to open  
the User Guide menu.  
*This does not apply to all systems with small integrated cameras.  
** Ordered separately  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.2.1  
Navigation  
Arrow keys and OK  
Navigate in the menu with the arrow keys on the remote control. The  
orange selector on screen shows the selected item. Press OK to select.  
Cancel key  
In the Menu, pressing Cancel (X) will hide the menu. If the menu is hidden,  
bring it back with OK. In other menus, pressing Cancel (X) takes you one  
step back. In an input field, pressing Cancel (X) will delete  
characters/numbers to the left.  
Back/Cancel button  
The X button in the menu corresponds with the X key on the remote.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.2.2  
Selfview  
The term “Selfview” means the outgoing image. In a normal call using the main camera, this is  
the image of yourself. The Selfview button toggles the images between Far End, Selfview and  
Dual Video (if any).  
How to use Selfview:  
1. Outside a call, pressing the Selfview button will switch between the near end video and a  
black screen/logo on the main monitor.  
2. In a point to point call, press the Selfview button once to switch from far end video to near  
end video to see a full screen picture of the outgoing video. Press Selfview again to go  
back to normal.  
3. In a point to point call with a dual video stream, the dual stream is displayed in the big  
picture. Press the Selfview button to toggle to the Near End picture, then the Far End  
picture, and finally back to the dual stream.  
The above behavior is similar for both single monitor systems and dual monitor systems. Selfview  
applies to the main monitor.  
3.2.2.1 Local PC Display  
When using the screen as your PC screen, it is recommended to set Local PC Display to On, see  
Screen Settings. That implies that you can display your PC locally while having a video meeting  
and you can keep on working without having the Far End participant viewing your PC screen.  
Note that this applies to single monitor systems only.  
It is also recommended to keep the Auto Layout setting On (default) to get a suitable layout when  
toggling from Local PC Display mode to standard conference mode.  
Use the Selfview button to toggle between Local PC Display mode and standard videoconference  
mode. An indicator tells you that your PC image is displayed locally.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Example:  
You are using the system as a PC and get an incoming call.  
When the setting “Use Screen as Local PC monitor” is On, you will keep your PC image  
displayed locally and the incoming call pops up in a PIP or as smaller images in a 1+3  
layout, depending on your system. You will see Local PC displayed in the big picture  
and Far End and/or Near End (your self) displayed in smaller pictures.  
Press the Selfview button to switch to standard conference mode. The Local PC image  
is no longer displayed and Far End is displayed in the big picture or full screen. Press  
Selfview again to see Near End. Pressing Selfview a third time will bring back the Local  
PC display mode.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.2.3  
Picture Layout  
The layout of the screen can either be shown as Picture in Picture (PIP) or Picture outside Picture  
(POP) when displaying more than one video image. The behavior of the Layout button is  
dependent on the Picture Layout setting in Screen Settings.  
3.2.3.1 Picture in Picture  
When Picture Layout is set to PIP, the Layout button makes it possible to see a second image in  
a smaller view in one of the corners of the screen. The second image will be placed on top of the  
main image. The user can decide in which corner the second image is to be displayed.  
3.2.3.2 Picture outside Picture  
When Picture Layout is set to POP, the Layout button makes it possible to see up to three images  
in a composition optimized for wide screens. The second image can be displayed either as a  
side-by-side the main image (1+1) or smaller images next to the main image (1+2 and 1+3).  
Press the Layout button once to get side-by-side view (1+1). Press again to get the layouts 1+2  
and 1+3, and finally go back to full screen view. You can also go back to full screen directly by  
pressing and holding Layout for 1 second. It is recommended to use Picture outside Picture for  
wide screen monitor systems.  
3.2.3.3 Auto Layout  
The system will automatically choose the best layout for your call. The layouts vary depending on  
how many participants there are and if you use a dual video source or not. You can however  
always change layout manually with the Layout button. Auto Layout applies when you open or  
close a dual stream, or add or disconnect participants.  
Auto Layout also includes the former automatic PIP. That implies that PIP will automatically be  
shown when suitable, e.g. to display selfview when you move your near end camera. The  
automatic PIP times out after a couple of seconds.  
If Auto Layout is Off you will get no automatic layout changes during a call and the user must  
manually control the images with the Layout button. Auto Layout is default On. To turn Auto  
Layout Off, go to Screen Settings.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.2.4  
Mic Off  
To mute the microphone during a call, press the Mic off button. An on-screen indicator appears in  
the upper right corner when the microphone is off. In a call, if audio is detected, the on-screen  
symbol will start to flash. Pressing the Mic off button one more time will activate the microphone  
again.  
Note that Mic off will mute all microphone inputs, but will not mute audio from the AUX and VCR  
inputs.  
When an incoming call is answered, the microphone may be in the off state because the Auto  
Answer setting is On+Mic off, see Auto Answer. The icon will start to flash when you start  
speaking. Remember to turn the microphone on before a meeting.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.2.5  
Volume + and -  
Press the Volume key to adjust the volume level of the codec only (not the monitor). An on-  
screen indicator will show the current level.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.2.6  
Number and Letter keys  
Pressing a number key when outside a call will bring up the call menu. When in a call, the  
number keys are used for Camera Presets. Press a number and go to the corresponding Camera  
Preset (see Camera Presets). However, when accessing an input field where numbers are  
required, the system automatically goes to number mode and numbers can be dialed with the  
number keys as usual.  
When accessing an input field where letters are required, the system automatically goes to letter  
mode. Writing letters works like on a mobile phone. Press the key that corresponds to your  
desired letter. Press the key as many times as needed to get the right letter. Change to lower or  
back to upper case letters with the a/A key, and space with the 0 _ key.  
To write numbers in a text input field, press the button through all the letters. Press once more  
and the number will appear.  
Example: How to write "System 123" in the System Name input field:  
Press the 7-key four times to get an "S".  
Press the #-key once to switch between upper case and lower case letters.  
Press the 9-key three times to get a "y".  
Press the 7-key four times to get an "s".  
Press the 8-key once to get a "t".  
Press the 3-key twice to get an "e".  
Press the 6-key once to get an "m".  
Press the 0-key once to get space.  
Press the 1-key three times to get a "1".  
Press the 2-key four times to get a "2".  
Press the 3-key four times to get a "3".  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.2.7  
Touch Tones  
To activate dialing touch tones during a call, press the Touch tones button. Otherwise the number  
keys will work as configured in the Number Key Mode, see Control Panel – Menu Settings –  
Number Key Mode. An indicator will let you know that Touch tones are enabled. Press OK to exit  
Touch tone mode.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.2.8  
Presets and Extension Numbers  
When pressing a number key on the remote control, while in a call, the user can decide what  
shall happen. The system can be configured to act automatic or manual.  
While in a call, the user presses a number key to:  
add another call  
dial extension numbers  
use camera presets  
Setting Number Key to Automatic:  
Some users want the camera presets as the default action when pressing a number key, when in  
a call. The number keys can be configured to always act like this; or to act in accordance to any  
of the other available choices.  
Setting Number Key to Manual:  
Sometimes, when you are in a call, you need to switch between adding another call, dial  
extension numbers or use camera presets. Then you would want the system to give you a choice  
of what to do. If you configure the Number Key Mode to Manual you can select the preferred  
action when pressing a number key.  
For more information about Number Key Mode, please see Control Panel - Menu Settings –  
Number Key Mode.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.3 On-screen Indicators  
The system has a number of icons signaling different settings:  
Microphone Off  
This indicator is shown when the microphone is turned off. Press the Mic off  
button again to turn the microphone back on, see Mic Off for details.  
Volume Off  
This indicator is shown when the volume is turned off. Press Volume + to turn the  
volume back on, see Volume + and - for details.  
Secure Conference, AES  
This double padlock indicator is shown when AES encryption (Secure  
Conference) is active, see Security for details.  
Secure Conference, DES  
This padlock indicator is shown when DES encryption (Secure Conference) is  
active, see Security for details.  
Not Secure Conference  
This open padlock indicator is shown during the initialization phase for AES or  
DES encryption. During this period the call is not secure, see Security for details.  
Warning  
This indicates that the system has detected a warning. Select the icon and press  
OK to see details on the warning. Please see Warnings for a list of possible  
warnings.  
Bad Network  
This indicator appears if the system detects network anomalies like packet loss  
(5%), jitter (200ms) etc., during a call. Open the menu by pressing the OK/Menu  
button and select the warnings icon too see details.  
Floor  
This indicator is shown when you are displayed in full screen in a multipoint  
conference, see Request Floor and Release Floor for details.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Telephone  
This indicates that there is a telephone participant in the conference. The  
displayed number indicates how many telephone participants there are in the  
conference.  
Duo Video / H.239  
This indicates that there is a Dual Video Stream sent from you (near end). The  
feature Duo Video / H239 allows participants at the far end to simultaneously  
watch a presenter on one screen and a live presentation on the adjoining screen.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.4 Using the Menu  
Menu outside a call  
Menu when in a call.  
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu. The menu contains all  
functions needed in order to control the system.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
The menu contains the following items:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Make a Call/Add Another Call  
Standby/End Call  
Camera Control  
Presentation  
Conference Services  
Control Panel  
Close  
See Menu Structure for a full overview of the menu.  
The functions of the menu are displayed as icons. The currently selected icon is marked by an  
orange square, and the name of the corresponding function is displayed on the line above, see  
the figure above.  
Press the OK button to activate the currently selected function.  
The menu automatically times out after 15 seconds if not used, see Menu timeout. Press the  
Menu button to bring it back. It is also possible to hide the menu manually by pressing the Cancel  
button on the remote control or select the Close icon in the menu.  
* Systems with no Camera Control icon available may have a Far End Control icon present when in a call and Far End  
Control is possible.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.5 Make a Call  
It is easy to make a call:  
1. Press the green Call button on remote control and Dial Number  
2. Press the green Call button again to initiate the call  
Display the Call menu by either:  
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or  
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control  
The TANDBERG system can make both Video calls and Telephone calls.  
Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. The Call Settings can be altered for the current call if  
required. The Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.  
It is possible to start Streaming from this menu.  
For setting up a conference, see Add Call for details.  
If the system has an embedded MCU (Multipoint Control Unit) you can set up a Multisite  
conference.  
The Phonebook and Call Type Selector icons are placed to the right of the Dial Number entry  
field.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.5.1  
Place a Call  
The TANDBERG system can make both Video calls and Telephone calls. A Call Type selector  
button is placed to the right of the number entry field. The button shows if it is a video call  
(default) or a telephone call. Press the button to show a drop down list to select the type of call.  
Display the Call menu by either:  
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or  
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control  
In the Call menu enter the Dial Number either:  
1. Manually, or  
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference  
participant.  
Select type of Call – Telephone Call or Video Call  
1. If you are dialing manually you might need to change the type of call. A button to the right  
of the entry field shows if you have a telephone call or a video call. This button is called  
the Call Type Selector.  
2. Click on the Call Type Selector to the left of the entry field and press OK to see the  
options. Select the type of call, Video Call or Telephone Call and press OK.  
When dialing manually, toggle between ABC/abc by pressing the # button on the remote control  
and between abc/123 by holding the # button for one second. For IP addresses, use a star as  
separator in the IP address.  
If you are making a video call and the system is registered on a gatekeeper or border controller  
with DNS support, there are several ways to call into the system:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
<IP address>  
<E.164>  
<H.323 ID>  
<H.323 ID>@<domain>  
<E.164>@<domain>  
<H.323 ID>@<IP address>  
<E.164 ID>@<IP address>  
See H.323 Settings for details.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Place the call by either:  
1. Use the arrow button on the remote control to select the Place Call icon and press OK, or  
2. Press the green call button on the remote control.  
TIP: When dialing a telephone number and pressing the green Call button on the remote control,  
the system will in most cases automatically interpret the number as a video number and not a  
telephone number. The interpretation can sometimes take a little while and it is faster to use the  
Call Type Selector button in the menu.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.5.2  
Add Call  
(Optional feature)  
Conference systems with built-in MultiSite can handle up to 4 video calls and 3 telephone calls  
simultaneously.  
It is possible to both set up a conference with many participants and also add participants during  
a conference.  
Set up a conference with two or more participants  
Display the Call menu by either:  
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or  
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control  
Add participant(s) to the conference:  
1. Select the Add Call icon and press OK.  
2. Dial Number manually, or  
3. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference  
participant, see Phone Book for details. It is also possible to select a predefined MultiSite  
entry, see New MultiSite Contact. Press OK on the remote control.  
TIP: Set up a list of all the wanted conference participants by selecting the Add Call the desired  
number of times, and enter their numbers afterwards.  
Select the Call Type – Telephone Call or Video Call  
1. If you are dialing manually you might need to change the type of call. A button to the right  
of the entry field shows if you have a telephone call or a video call. This button is called  
the Call Type Selector.  
2. Click on the Call Type Selector and press OK to see the options. Select the type of call,  
Video Call or Telephone Call and press OK.  
Start Multisite conference:  
1. When all participants have been added to the list, press OK button on remote control or  
select the Place Call icon on the menu to start the Multisite conference.  
Add participant(s) during a conference:  
1. Display the Call menu during a call and select Add Another Call from the menu, or the  
green Call button on the remote control.  
2. Enter new participants in the same way as described above.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.5.3  
Call Settings  
The Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. Each call will be set up with the Call Settings if  
the settings are not altered. Usually it is not necessary for the user to alter the settings.  
The Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.  
When setting up a call in the Make a Call menu:  
1. Select the Call Settings field for the participant and press the OK button on the remote  
control.  
2. Make desired changes to Network, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k). If this is to be the new  
default call settings, select Set as Default in the menu.  
3. Select the OK icon and press the OK button on the remote control.  
It is possible to make the changes made to the Call Settings default by selecting Set as Default  
and OK. These settings will now be the default settings for all future manually dialed calls.  
These settings are also available in the menu Control Panel - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.5.4  
SIP Services  
SIP enables you to use the features Add Call and Transfer even if your system doesn’t have  
multipoint capabilities. To get the SIP Services available, you have to make a call using SIP as  
your Net. (See Call Settings)  
3.5.4.1 Add Call  
You can add another call to your existing SIP call.  
How to Add another Call:  
1) Open the menu by pressing OK (if it is not already open).  
2) Press Add another Call or press the green button on the remote to open the Call menu.  
3) Dial number of your next call. Press Place Call or press the green key on the remote  
control to connect the call.  
4) The second call connects. The menu displays an icon below the menu line to indicate  
that you have a call waiting.  
3.5.4.2 Transfer  
It is possible to transfer your call to another number.  
How to Transfer a point to point call:  
1) Open the menu by pressing OK (if it is not already open).  
2) Press Add another Call or press the green button on the remote control to open the Call  
menu.  
3) Dial the number of the person you would like to transfer your call to.  
4) Choose the Transfer Call button and press OK. Your call is transferred.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.5.5  
Streaming  
Streaming lets you broadcast your meeting to participants on the web. The web participants can  
listen to the meeting, see snapshots, but not participate themselves. Snapshots of current stream  
(if MultiSite), selfview, far end and DuoVideo streams are accessible via http. See Appendix 6 for  
descriptions of the possible snapshot files.  
How to use Streaming:  
1. Choose Streaming from the Call Menu to open the Streaming menu.  
2. Press Start Streaming from the menu line. An indicator will appear on the screen when  
streaming is activated.  
3. Press Stop Streaming to end streaming. Streaming will also end when you disconnect the  
call.  
4. Press Streaming Settings if you want to change streaming settings (see Streaming  
Settings below)  
How to view streaming from a PC:  
1. After streaming is started, an easy way to view the streamed audio/video is to start your  
Web browser and enter the IP-address of the streaming system.  
2. After the Web page of the system is shown, click on Streaming. Alternatively, enter  
http://<codec/ip-address>/showstream.ssi  
Streaming Settings  
Address  
Address is defined as the IP-address of a streaming client, streaming  
server or a multicast address. Giving an address in the range 224.0.0.1-  
239.255.255.255 will broadcast the stream to any host that has joined  
the specified multicast group. Specifying normal broadcast address  
255.255.255.255 will broadcast to any members on the LAN.  
Address Port  
If several codec’s are streaming to the same IP-address, different ports  
have to be used in order for the client to know which stream to receive.  
If the first codec streams on port 2240 and the second codec on port  
2250, the client has to specify which port to listen to. Video is  
transmitted on the specified port; audio is transmitted on the port  
number 4 greater than the specified video port, in this case 2244 and  
2254.  
TTL/Router  
Hops  
This is used for streaming data to limit how many routers the data  
should pass before it is rejected. If TTL is set to 2, data will not traverse  
more than 2 router hops.  
Streaming  
ƒ
Auto: Enables streaming of both local and far end video.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Source*  
Selection of which site to be streamed is done using voice  
switching (the site that speaks is streamed).  
Local: Only the local video will be streamed.  
Remote: Only the far end video will be streamed.  
ƒ
ƒ
Local and far end audio is always streamed.  
Allow Remote  
Start  
ƒ
ƒ
On: Streaming can be started from external user interfaces like  
the Web-browser or Telnet session.  
Off: Streaming can only be started from the Video System User  
Interface using the remote control, or by using the Data port.  
This will prevent activation of streaming using Web browser or  
Telnet sessions. See also Password section below  
Announcements  
ƒ
ƒ
On: The codec will send announcement packets to the network  
that it is streaming. This enables a streaming client (e.g. a PC)  
to connect to the codec’s streaming session. Used by Cisco  
IP/TV.  
Off: No announcement packets will be transmitted.  
Video Rate  
Defines the Video streaming rate from the system. Range is 16 kbps -  
320 kbps. In addition, audio (G.711) streaming rate is 64 kbps, providing  
a maximum streaming rate of 384 kbps.  
Streaming  
Password  
Set password so that only participants entering correct password will be  
able to view the streaming session. Entering a password will prevent  
unauthorized people from accessing the streaming session.  
*The streaming source setting is not available when streaming only is supported outside a call.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.5.6  
Dialing In From Outside the Enterprise  
Dialing in Without Being Registered to a TANDBERG Gatekeeper  
The feature enhancement enables dialing through a TANDBERG Gatekeeper without being  
registered to it. This makes it easy to call in from a video system outside the enterprise.  
It's done by dialing: EndPointAlias@GatekeeperAddress[:Port] where:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
EndPointAlias: is the alias of the endpoint you want to call, the endpoint you call must be  
registered with this alias on the gatekeeper  
GatekeeperAddress: is either the IP-address of the gatekeeper in the form a.b.c.d (or  
IPv6 a:b:c:d:a:b:c:d) or the DNS name (A/AAAA or SRV record) of the gatekeeper.  
Port: is optional and gives the Q.931 port to initiate the call. The port default is 1720 and  
can in most cases be left out.  
Currently the SRV records _h323cs._tcp. and _h323ts._tcp. are supported.  
If using an IP-address, or if not specifying the port, the default is using the normal Q.931 with port  
1720.  
NOTE! To be able to make such a call, this feature must be enabled in your gatekeeper or border  
controller, and the called endpoint must be registered with the enterprise gatekeeper or border  
controller.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.6 Answer an incoming call  
How to answer an incoming call:  
ƒ
To accept an incoming call, press the OK button or the green Call button on the remote  
control.  
How to reject an incoming call:  
ƒ
To reject an incoming call, select the Reject icon and press the OK button, or press the  
End Call button on the remote control.  
Incoming calls will connect automatically if Auto Answer is set to On, see Auto Answer for details.  
When idle, the system will accept all incoming calls as long as Incoming MCU Calls and Incoming  
Telephone Calls are set to On, see Permissions for details. Also, Do Not Disturb must not be  
activated, see Do Not Disturb for more details.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.7 End Call  
How to end a call:  
ƒ
ƒ
Press the red End Call button on the remote control, or  
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu and select End Call.  
When the End Call dialog box is displayed either:  
ƒ
ƒ
Press the red End Call button on the remote control again, or  
Press the OK button to confirm that the call is to be ended.  
How to end a MultiSite call:  
In the list of participants:  
Note that switching off the monitor(s), using the power button on the monitor, will not end a  
call. Some systems come with monitors that are not possible to switch off.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.8 Standby  
The system will automatically go to Standby mode when it is not in use. In standby mode, the  
screen(s) are black. It is however still possible to receive incoming calls.  
How to enter standby mode manually:  
ƒ
ƒ
Select Standby from the menu and select Standby Now, or  
Press the End Call button on the remote control twice.  
How to exit standby mode:  
When the system is in standby, pick up the remote control, or press any of its keys to  
activate the system again.  
ƒ
The standby mode of the system should be enabled if the system is to be left idle.  
Note! Standby is not activated by switching off the power to the monitor(s) (some systems  
come with monitors that are not possible to switch off.).  
When Camera Standby Mode is On  
When Camera Standby mode is On, the camera turns away when standby is activated. When the  
system is activated the camera turns back to normal position.  
If the system is set for Use screen as Local PC monitor, see Screen Settings, the Standby  
mode will be disabled when the codec detects a video signal from the PC. If the PC video  
signal is not detected, the standby mode will be re-enabled.  
It is possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour or 3 hours, see Delay  
Standby for 1 hour and Delay Standby for 3 hours.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.8.1  
Delay Standby for 1 hour  
Delay Standby for 1 hour postpones the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour.  
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system  
from automatically blanking the monitors.  
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 3 hours, see Delay  
Standby for 3 hours.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.8.2  
Delay Standby for 3 hours  
Delay Standby for 3 hours postpones the automatic standby mode for 3 hours.  
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system  
from automatically blanking the monitors.  
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour, see Delay  
Standby for 1 hour.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.8.3  
Do Not Disturb  
To prevent the system from accepting any incoming calls, activete the Do Not Disturb function.  
The caller will hear a busy tone when calling the system. The monitor will be black when Do Not  
Disturb is active, see figure below. This is useful when using the display for a presentation as  
a local PC monitor and you do not wish any incoming calls during the presentation.  
End Do Not Disturb by pressing any key on the remote control.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.9 Phone Book  
The Phone Book is available via the Phone Book button on the remote control or from the Make a  
Call menu.  
Using the Phone Book is time saving and prevents the user from inadvertently calling the wrong  
number. The contacts are sorted alphabetically. The contact names are displayed in the list and  
the telephone or video numbers, bandwidth and net profiles of the selected contact are displayed  
at the bottom line.  
Navigate up and down in the Phone Book with the arrow keys on the remote control. Use the  
letter keys to search through the contacts beginning with the typed letter.  
Find names starting with a “C”:  
Press the 2-key three times to get a "C".  
Find the name Charlie:  
Press the 2-key three times to get a "C".  
Press the 4-key two times to continue with a "h".  
Remove letters by pressing the Cancel button on the remote control.  
The Up One Level button brings you to the top of list and clears all letters typed.  
The functions in the Phone Book are available when pressing the left arrow key on the remote  
control, and then the up and down arrow keys. Note that the last selected contact will be marked.  
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the folders Placed Calls, Missed  
Calls, Received Calls and My Contacts. Global Contacts are listed below these folders.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
The following information is available from the Phone Book:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Placed Calls  
Missed Calls  
Received Calls  
My Contacts  
Corporate Contacts / Global Contacts  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.9.1  
Call Log  
The Call Log lists Placed Calls, Missed Calls and Received Calls. That allows the user to see  
which calls that are made in the past. The lists contain a maximum of 30 numbers and the  
numbers are stored in these lists until the system is restarted. If the contacts listed are available  
in the phone book, the names will be displayed instead of the numbers.  
Placed Calls lists all outgoing calls, Missed Calls lists the calls that are not accepted and  
Received Calls lists all incoming calls. The calls in the lists are marked with these icons:  
outgoing calls  
incoming calls  
missed calls  
The following buttons are available from these folders :  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Now  
Copy to My Contacts  
Delete  
Delete All  
Cancel  
How to make a call using the call lists:  
1. Select a number from the list.  
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the  
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call  
depending on the selected contact. Alternatively, press the OK button when the contact is  
selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with the name of the contact in  
the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the call settings for this  
contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call. The call will be set  
up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.  
3. Wait for the call to connect.  
How to delete numbers in the call lists do one of the following:  
ƒ
ƒ
Choose the Delete button to delete a selected contact from the call list.  
Choose the Delete All button to delete all contacts listed in the call list.  
Note that you will not delete contacts from the Phone Book if you delete them from the call lists.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.9.2  
My Contacts  
My Contacts are the locally stored contacts on the system. This means that it is possible to add  
new contacts and edit or delete existing contacts. My Contacts can store up to 200 contacts.  
How to make a call using My Contacts:  
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letters with the  
letter keys.  
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the  
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call  
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK  
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with  
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the  
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.  
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.  
3. Wait for the call to connect.  
Note that the telephone or video number and profile of the selected contact are displayed on  
the bottom line.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
The following functions are available from My Contacts:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Now  
New Contact  
New MultiSite Contact  
Edit Contact  
Delete Contact  
Close  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.9.2.1  
Add New Contact  
The New Contact function is available from My Contacts.  
Add a new contact to My Contacts by:  
1. Select the New Contacts button to open the New Contacts dialog box.  
2. Enter Name by using the letter keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be  
interpreted as letters. Toggle between capital letters and small letters by pressing the #  
button on the remote control. The maximum name length is 30 characters. For numbers,  
press the # button for one second.  
3. Enter Number by using the number keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be  
interpreted as numbers. The maximum number length is 60 numbers. Use a star as  
separator in IP addresses. For letters, press the # button for one second.  
4. Alter the default setting of Call Type if necessary.  
5. Alter the default setting of Network if necessary.  
6. Alter the default setting of Bandwidth if necessary. For bandwidth 2x64 kbps or 2x56  
kbps, two numbers are required, see Default Call Settings for more details.  
7. Alter the default setting of Restrict (56k) if necessary.  
8. Press OK to save.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.9.2.2  
New MultiSite Contact  
(Optional feature*)  
The New MultiSite Contact function is available from My Contacts.  
It is possible to pre-define the participants of a conference meeting as a MultiSite Contact. All  
participants in the MultiSite Contact will then be connected automatically instead of having to call  
the participants one by one.  
My Contacts can hold up to 50 MultiSites Contacts. The MultiSite Contacts consist of participants  
that are already stored in My Contacts.  
It is possible to have up to a total of 4 video participants and 3 telephone participants in a  
meeting.  
How to define a New MultiSite Contact:  
1. Open the Phone Book via the Phone Book button on the remote control or in the Make a  
Call menu.  
2. Select the New MultiSite Contact icon. The New MultiSite Contact dialogue box is  
displayed.  
3. Enter a name of the MultiSite Contact, and press OK on the remote control.  
4. Select Add Participant. The content of the Local Phone Book is displayed. Find the  
desired contact and press the OK button on the remote control. Repeat until all the  
desired participants are selected.  
5. Press OK to save the MultiSite Contact.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Bandwidth for a MultiSite Contact call  
When calling a MultiSite Contact, the system will try to call the participants with their specified  
bandwidths. If the total bandwidth exceeds the system's maximum bandwidth the system will  
downspeed and distribute the available bandwidth equally among all the participants.  
Example: In a MultiSite Contact there is one participant with bandwidth 256kbps and one  
participant with bandwidth 384kbps. 512kbps is the maximum bandwidth of the system.  
The two participants' bandwidth exceeds the maximum bandwidth. The system wills then  
downspeed so that each participant connects with equal bandwidth, i.e. 512kbps/2 = 256kbps.  
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.9.2.3  
Edit Contact  
The Edit Contact function is available from My Contacts.  
How to edit a contact in the Local Phone Book:  
1. Select the contact that is to be edited.  
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Edit  
Contact icon is selected.  
3. The current settings for this contact is displayed in a dialogue box. Alter the wanted  
settings.  
4. Press OK to save.  
If the altered contact is part of a MultiSite Contact*, the contact will be updated in the MultiSite  
Contact automatically.  
* The MultiSite option is not available on all systems.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.9.2.4  
Delete Contact  
The Delete Contact function is available from My Contacts.  
How to delete a contact:  
1. Select the contact that is to be deleted.  
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Delete  
Contact icon is selected. The Delete Contact dialogue box is displayed.  
3. Confirm by pressing the OK button again.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.9.3  
Corporate Contacts / Global Contacts  
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the Global Contacts* or the  
Corporate Directory** below the folders: Placed Calls, Missed Calls, Received Calls and My  
Contacts.  
These contacts cannot be changed locally by the system, only from the management system. If  
there is a need to modify the number or any settings of a contact before making a call, select the  
contact and press OK on the remote control. The Make a Call menu is displayed and the settings  
can be altered before placing the call. The changes are not saved.  
How to make a call using Global Contacts:  
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter  
keys or use the search function described in Search.  
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the  
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call  
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK  
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with  
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the  
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.  
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.  
3. Wait for the call to connect.  
From Global Contacts the following functions are available:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Now  
Up one Level  
Search  
Copy to My Contacts  
Close  
* The Global Contacts are stored locally on the ftp-server of the system. This will include the first 400 entries of the  
Corporate Directory, and will not contain any folders. This directory is hidden from the user as long as the system is able  
to fetch the Corporate Directory, otherwise the Global Contacts will be displayed.  
** The Corporate Directory is available if the system is connected to an external management system like the TANDBERG  
Management Suite (TMS) and if it is enabled in Phone Book Settings.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.9.3.1 Up one Level  
Global Contacts can be arranged in a tree structure with several sub folders. Use the Up one  
Level button to navigate up in the tree structure.  
When a search in the Global Phone Book is made by using the Search function, only contacts  
matching the search text are displayed. Select the Up one Level button to return back to the  
alphabetical list.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.9.3.2  
Search  
The phone book can contain an unlimited amount of global contacts. Using search makes it  
easier to find the wanted contact.  
How to search in the Global Phone Book:  
1. Select the Search icon.  
2. Enter search text in the dialogue box that appears and press the OK button on the  
remote control. The system will list all entries that contain the entered letter combination.  
3. It is also possible to search on first letter in the Phone Book with the letter keys on the  
remote control.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.9.3.3  
Copy Contact to My Contacts  
The Copy Contact to My Contacts function is available from the Placed Calls, Missed Calls,  
Received Calls and Global Contacts folders, see Phone Book for details.  
It may be wise to copy contacts that are often used to My Contacts. Note that the local copy will  
not be updated if the Global Contacts are updated from the management system.  
How to copy a contact from the Global Phone Book to the Local Phone Book:  
1. Select the contact to be copied to My Contacts.  
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Copy  
Contact to My Contacts icon is selected.  
A message box telling that the operation was successful will be displayed.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.10 Camera Control  
There are several ways to control the camera:  
ƒ
Control the camera directly with the arrow keys when the menu is closed or use the Move  
Camera function in the menu to control both the near end and far end camera, see Move  
Camera and Far End Control for details.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Use the zoom button on the remote control will zoom the picture in (+) and out (-).  
Use Camera Presets, see Camera Presets for details.  
Adjust focus, brightness and white balance, see Picture Control for details.  
Use Automatic Camera Tracking, see Camera Tracking for details.  
Use the TANDBERG Tracker, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG  
Tracker.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.10.1 Move Camera  
It is possible to move the camera with the remote control or via the menu.  
Moving the camera directly with the remote control  
When the menu is hidden, the arrow keys will work on the camera. If the menu is displayed, press  
the Cancel button on the remote control to hide it. Use the left and right arrow keys to pan the  
camera, and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and  
out.  
Moving the Camera via the menu:  
1. Select the Camera Control icon from the menu.  
2. Select the Move Camera button in the Camera Control menu.  
3. Use the arrow keys on the remote control to pan and tilt the camera.  
4. Press OK when done.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.10.2 Far End Control  
Far End Control allows you to control your conference partner’s camera. An example of when this  
feature could be especially helpful is if it is not possible to see what a participant at the far end is  
writing on their white board. Use Far End Control to move the far end camera and zoom closer on  
the white board. Far End Camera Control is useful if e.g. it is not possible to see what a  
participant at the far end is writing on their white board. Use Far End Control to move the far end  
camera and zoom closer on the white board. Use the left and right arrow keys to pan the camera,  
and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and out.  
You can also control your conference partner’s video sources and presets and even request a  
snapshot from the far end side. Enabling Far End Control will put the system in Far End mode  
and camera control, camera preset, presentation, and snapshot will work on the far end camera.  
Far End Control only works when you are in a call and if the far end side supports H.281 (Far End  
Camera Control). You can prevent others from controlling your system by setting Allow Far End  
Camera Control to Off in Control Panel - General - Permissions, see Permissions for details.  
How to use Far End control:  
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the menu.  
2. Select the Far End Control icon. When far end camera control is selected an indicator will  
appear and it is possible to control the far end camera, camera preset, presentation and  
snapshot for the far end.  
3. Deselect the Far End Control button to deactivate far end control mode. This may also be  
done by pressing the Cancel or the OK button.  
Far End Camera Presets  
Far End Camera Presets work just like your own camera presets. When Far End is on, use the  
number keys to activate far end camera presets. You are however not allowed to save far end  
camera presets.  
Far End Presentation  
Pressing the Presentation key or choosing a presentation from the presentation menu while Far  
End is on, will result in opening a far end presentation. Be aware of that the far end video sources  
may not correspond with the buttons in the presentation menu. If you press Document Camera,  
the far end side might have configured another video source on this input.  
Request snapshot from the Far End  
You can request a snapshot from the far end side. Put the system in Far End mode and press  
Snapshot on the remote control to take a snapshot of the current far end video (current is default  
snapshot source).  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.10.3 Camera Presets  
Use camera presets to easily vary between predefined near end camera angles. This is useful  
when pictures from many different camera angles have to be sent to the far end. E.g. in a  
meeting there is a white board, a PC and a small meeting table. Use camera presets to move  
between these camera perspectives in order to present the correct information to the participants  
at the far end without having to move the camera manually every time. A preset is deactivated  
when the camera is moved manually with the arrow keys.  
Presets are available from the menu. When you are in a call you can also activate presets directly  
from the remote control. You can save up to 15 presets. Each camera preset is able to store  
camera angle, video source and audio source selection.  
How to use preset directly from the remote control:  
When you are in a call you can activate presets with just one press on the number keys on  
remote control. The number keys will however not work as presets when you are in an input field,  
in order to write numbers or letters.  
1. Press a number on the remote control. The camera will move to the corresponding angle,  
or video source, stored on that number.  
How to use presets via the menu:  
1. Select Camera Control - Display Presets in the menu.  
2. Select the wanted preset with the arrow keys on the remote control and  
press OK.  
How to save a new preset directly from the remote control:  
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video source that you  
would like to store as a preset.  
2. Press a number on the remote control for 1 second to save the preset. It is possible to  
store one camera preset on each of the number keys, 0-9, when storing camera presets  
from the remote control. (Camera preset 10 is stored on the 0-key).  
3. The new camera preset will overwrite any existing camera preset on that number.  
How to save a new Preset via the menu:  
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video  
source that you would like to store as a preset.  
2. Select Camera Control - Save New Camera Preset in the menu.  
3. Enter a number between 0 and 14 and press OK.  
4. Type a name for the preset to make it easier to separate the different  
presets.  
5. Press Save. The new Camera Preset will overwrite any existing camera  
preset on that number.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker  
How to save presets for the TANDBERG Tracker:  
1. Select which camera preset is to be used on the TANDBERG Tracker.  
2. Move the camera to the desired position to store on the tracker.  
3. Select Move Camera - Save New Preset in the menu.  
4. All camera presets are accessible from the TANDBERG Tracker.  
For more information, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG Tracker.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.10.5 Picture Control  
Focus, Brightness and White balance are set for auto focus, auto brightness and auto white  
balance by default. If you need to set focus, brightness and white balance manually, go to Picture  
Control in the Camera Control menu.  
Focus  
Auto  
Auto focus continuously updates the focus throughout the call. When moving  
the camera, the system will use auto focus for 5 seconds to set the right focus  
of the new camera position. After 5 seconds auto focus is turned off to prevent  
continuous focus adjustments of the camera.  
Manual at  
Precision  
HD Camera  
When Manual is selected the + and - buttons are enabled. Select the + or -  
button and press OK button to adjust the focus. The manual focus has 10  
steps. If focus is set manually, the system will stay in manual focus and not  
change to auto focus automatically even if you zoom or move the camera.  
When the user zoom or move the camera and manual focus is on, the  
indicator line should say “Manual Focus”.  
Manual at  
WAVE II  
Camera  
When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to adjust  
the focus. The temporary focus will last until you move the camera again and  
auto focus will take effect.  
Camera Brightness  
Auto  
Auto brightness continuously updates the brightness of the camera picture.  
Manual When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to manually  
adjust the camera brightness. If brightness is set manually, the system will keep  
this brightness level also when the camera is moved. When the user zoom or  
move the camera and manual brightness is on, the indicator line should say  
“Manual Brightness”.  
White Balance  
Auto  
Auto white balance continuously updates the white balance.  
Manual  
When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to  
manually adjust the white balance. The manual white balance has 10 steps. If  
white balance is set manually, the system will keep this white balance also when  
the camera is moved. When the user zoom or move the camera and manual  
white balance is on, the indicator line should say “Manual White Balance”.  
Backlight Compensation*  
On  
The Backlight Compensation can be set to On.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Backlight is used to compensate for lights shining directly at the camera (usually  
the sun entering the window) to avoid a too dark image from the room.  
Off  
The Backlight Compensation can be set to Off (default).  
* The Backlight setting is only valid for Precision HD Cameras  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.10.6 Camera Tracking  
Through Camera Tracking and the use of two or three microphones, the camera can  
automatically position itself on the current speaker. Before using camera tracking, the camera  
positions used must be stored at Preset 7 (Mic1) and Preset 8 (Mic2).  
How to use Camera Tracking:  
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the Menu.  
2. Enable Camera Tracking by choosing Camera Tracking. An indicator will appear on the  
screen.  
3. End Camera Tracking by deselecting the Camera Tracking button. Camera Tracking will  
also end if you activate a camera preset or move the camera manually with the arrow  
keys.  
Example: You have placed Microphone 1 on the table. Where should you position the camera  
for Preset 7?  
The camera position stored at Preset 7 must be related to Microphone 1. Therefore all  
participants who are located closest to Mic1 should be included in the Preset 7 camera  
position etc. When camera tracking is activated and a person close to Mic1 speaks, Preset 7  
will be automatically selected.  
When activating another video source (for instance document camera), camera tracking will be  
temporarily disabled until you re-select Main Camera or a Main Camera preset.  
The camera tracking speeds may be altered in the Video Settings menu in Control Panel, see  
Camera Tracking Mode for further details.  
A Voice Detector makes the system more tolerant of noise and ensures the camera not to move  
by noise such as paper shuffling, etc.  
Note that pressing Mic Off will temporarily disable camera tracking until you turn on the  
microphone again.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.11 Presentation  
The Presentation Functionality in the system enables you to show other available video sources  
in addition to your Main Camera. This is perfect for meetings where you would like to show a  
PowerPoint presentation, for example. You can even use arrow keys up and down on the remote  
control to activate Page Up/Down on the PC (this only applies when using VNC).  
Use Presentation outside a call to make a local presentation for the people in your own meeting  
room. Use Presentation when you are in a call to make a presentation for the far end as well.  
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the Presentation Key on the remote control.  
The presentation key shows a predefined video source, PC is the default. It is possible to change  
the presentation source in the Presentation menu. Choose Presentation from the Menu if you  
want to select a video source manually. The Presentation Menu offers you all the available video  
sources supported by your system.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.11.1 Presentation Key  
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the presentation key on the remote control.  
The presentation key is used to start and stop a presentation. The presentation key will display  
PC (default*).  
When holding the presentation key for 1 second, the presentation menu will be displayed. This  
menu allows you to choose other video sources.  
You can also find the Presentation button in the Menu on screen. Select Presentation button and  
press OK on remote control.  
The default presentation source can be permanently changed in Presentation Settings.  
When using the presentation key, your presentation will be displayed as a Dual Stream, if  
possible. If the call does not support a dual video stream, the presentation will display as main  
video stream.  
How to start and end a Presentation using the Presentation key:  
1. Press the Presentation key. The video source that is set as presentation source is  
displayed in full screen (PC is default). Remember to connect your PC to the codec in  
advance.  
2. Press the Presentation key again to end the presentation and go back to main camera.  
* If available on your system.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.11.2 Presentation Menu  
The Presentation menu offers you all available video sources; Main Camera, PC, Document  
Camera, VCR, AUX and VNC. All these sources can be used as Main Video Stream or Dual  
Video Stream (Duo Video / H.239). Not all systems has all video sources available, see Interfaces  
for details.  
Outside a call the presentation menu only contains Main Video Sources. In a call, the headers  
Dual Video and Snapshot display in addition to Main Video (if the call supports Duo Video  
/H.239). Use the up/down keys to change between video sources and headers. Start a Dual  
Stream by selecting a Dual Video source. Close the Dual Stream by deselecting the video source  
button.  
Note that Dual Video Stream may not be available if the option is not installed, not supported  
on your system or if already activated. Use the up/down keys to change between video source  
and header.  
For Snapshots, see Take New Snapshot and Display Snapshot.  
How to change your main video source:  
1. Choose the Main Video header from the Presentation menu.  
2. Choose your desired video source and press OK.  
How to show a presentation in addition to your main video (Dual Video Stream):  
1. Select the Duo Video header.  
2. Choose a dual video source and press OK.  
3. Deselect the active video source button to end the presentation.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/VGA Input)  
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)  
Users often have their presentations on a laptop that is brought into the meeting room.  
Remember to connect your PC to the codec before you press the Presentation button. Note that  
the image will appear smoother on the system if your presentation is already displaying in full  
screen on your PC prior to connecting your PC to the video system.  
Plugging a PC into the system is made extremely simple through the PC Presenter, avoiding the  
need for any additional hardware such as a projector, PC/Video converter or extra cables.  
How to connect a PC to the codec with the DVI/VGA cable:  
1. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to the PC Presenter (PC DVI-I in) connector on the codec.  
2. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to your PC (VGA Output).  
3. If you would like to use audio as part of the presentation, connect the headset jack on  
your PC to the audio input on the PC presenter VGA cable.  
4. When the PC is connected to the codec, hit the Presentation key to display the PC image  
on the system.  
If no PC image is displayed on your monitor, make sure that your PC is set to activate your VGA  
output. On most laptop PCs you must press a special key combination to switch the PC image  
from the PC screen to the video screen.  
Note that the DVI/VGA input is compliant with VESA Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)  
and will be able to reconfigure the PC’s screen settings if it is currently configured to a VGA  
format that the system doesn’t support.  
Also note that you can use the DVI input to transmit high resolution images from document  
cameras or other sources supporting the HD format 720p.  
For details on formats supported on 'DVI-I in', please refer to Interfaces.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC  
(Optional feature)  
PC SoftPresenter is used to display PC images on your system without using a VGA cable (PC  
Presenter). The system and your PC must be connected to the same LAN. In addition, VNC  
(Virtual Network Computing) server software must be installed on the PC. Free software can be  
downloaded from http://www.realvnc.com. Install the software by running the downloaded file.  
How to configure the VNC Server software:  
1. Select the following to setup VNC; Windows-Start\All Programs\Highlight  
RealVNC\Hightlight VNC Server\Show User Properties  
2. Select Accept Socket Connections.  
3. Select Auto for Display Number. Display Number in the system must then have the value  
0.  
4. Enter a password in the Password-field. This must correspond with the VNC Settings on  
your system.  
How to show PC using the PC Soft Presenter and VNC:  
1. Start the VNC software on your PC.  
2. To use VNC, you must configure VNC Settings. Open VNC Settings in the Presentation  
Settings menu in Control Panel.  
3. Fill in the IP address of your PC, Display Number and Password.  
4. Press Save.  
5. When you now choose VNC as video source in the Presentation menu, you will see your  
PC using VNC. If a PowerPoint presentation is being displayed then you can scroll  
through the presentation by pressing the up and down arrows on the remote control. VNC  
settings will go back to default when the system goes to standby.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239)  
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)  
With Dual Stream you have the opportunity to show two different live video streams  
simultaneously, main video and one additional source. This is handy when showing a  
presentation. You see the live presentation and the live video of the presenter simultaneously.  
When you start a presentation, Dual Stream starts automatically if both local and remote system  
supports Dual Stream. If one of the systems does not support Dual Stream, no second video  
stream will be established and your presentation will be shown as your main video.  
Dual Stream is available on all systems with Natural Presenter Package installed. H.239 is the  
new ITU standard defining how to send two video sources simultaneously.  
Example:  
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote  
control to start a PC presentation.  
PC will appear as a Dual Video Stream in addition to main camera. End the Dual Stream  
presentation by pressing presentation key again.  
In Presentation Settings, you can set Presentation Start to Manual. That means that Dual Stream  
will not start automatically.  
Example:  
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote  
control to start a PC presentation.  
A dialog box appears where you can choose to show PC as Dual Video Stream or not. This is  
handy if you not always want to use Dual Stream.  
Dual Stream and Bandwidth  
Using Dual Stream, the quality automatically downspeeds to the optimal bandwidth. This means  
that you need higher quality to allocate enough bandwidth for the two video streams. Dual Stream  
borrows bandwidth from main video stream. When Dual Stream is closed, the bandwidth is  
returned to the main video.  
Note that when selecting the Document Camera or PC, the system will automatically request floor  
when connected to a MCU conference as MultiSite host* or connected to an external MCU.  
* Not available on all systems.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot  
The system can take a snapshot of your live video. Snapshot is handy when you are in a call with  
a system that does not support Dual Stream. Use Snapshot to show a snapshot of your  
presentation and continue the meeting with main camera.  
How to use snapshot:  
You find Take New Snapshot in the Presentation menu.  
1. Select the Snapshot header.  
2. Select Take New Snapshot and press OK to take a snapshot.  
Snapshot is found on the Star key on the remote control.  
1. Press Star and you take a snapshot of the current video source (current video is default  
snapshot source). You can change the snapshot source in Control Panel - Presentation  
Settings. Note that snapshot does not work when you are in an input field in the menu  
(the star key is then used to write the star sign).  
Note that Take New Snapshot is not possible when Dual Video Stream is activated and that  
it is only available when you are in a call.  
Note that the Snapshot feature uses H.261 Annex D and hence will not work when using  
H.264 video compression  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.11.7 Display Snapshot  
The system stores the last sent or received Snapshot. The snapshot is deleted automatically after  
the call.  
How to display snapshots:  
1. To view a stored snapshot, first choose the Snapshot header.  
2. Select Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.  
3. Press the Hide Snapshot button to deselect it.  
4. When disconnecting the call, the stored snapshot will be erased.  
Receiving snapshots:  
1. When receiving a snapshot, the snapshot is displayed in full screen.  
2. Press OK to exit from the snapshot. The last sent or received snapshot will be stored in  
the graphics memory and erased once the call is disconnected.  
Note that Display Snapshot is only available when you have a stored snapshot.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.12 Services  
A Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) enables several sites to participate in the same conference.  
During an MCU conference, the status line will provide information about the conference.  
Services contain the following features:  
Request Floor and Release Floor  
Conference Layout  
Terminal Names  
Chair Control  
Assign Floor and Release Floor from Participant  
View Site and End View  
Disconnect Participant  
Terminate Meeting  
More about Multisite (embedded MCU)  
Text Chat  
You can make a multipoint conference in different ways. The Conference Services vary  
depending on how you make the call, see Add call for details.  
Example of MultiSite for high end systems. Note that the illustrations may differ from the actual product.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Example of MultiSite for mid- to low end systems. Note that the illustrations may differ from the actual product.  
TF *  
Using the system’s internal MCU, MultiSite  
Most TANDBERG MXP systems have an optional built-in MCU, which is called MultiSite*. It  
supports up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls including yourself for high-end systems, and 4  
video calls and 3 telephone calls including yourself for the mid- and lower end systems. The  
MultiSite supports both Split Screen and Voice Switched mode. With MultiSite, you have the  
following services:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Request/Release Floor  
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant  
Terminal Names  
Layout (Auto/4 Split/5+1 Split/Voice Switched)  
Using an external MCU that supports Chair Control (H.243)  
With an external MCU that supports H.243, you have the following services:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Request/Release Floor  
View Participant/End View  
Chair Control  
If you take Chair control, you get the following services:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Release Chair  
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant  
Disconnect Participant  
Terminate Meeting  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Using an external MCU with limited Chair Control Support you may have the following  
services  
With an external MCU that does not support H.243, you have the following services:  
ƒ
ƒ
Request/Release Floor  
Terminal Names  
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor  
When requesting floor, your video will be broadcasted in full screen to all other participants in the  
conference. Request Floor is useful when you want to speak or display something in front of all  
participants.  
Release Floor when you are done and make the floor available for other participants in the  
conference. An indicator appears when you have floor and disappears when you release floor,  
see floor indicator in On-screen Indicators.  
How to use Request and Release Floor:  
1. Open the Menu by pressing OK.  
2. Choose Conference Services and press OK.  
3. Choose Request Floor and press OK. A Floor indicator will appear when you have floor.  
4. When done, press the same button again, which now means Release Floor. The Floor  
indicator disappears.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.12.2 Conference Layout  
(Only supported by TANDBERG MultiSite*)  
With a TANDBERG MultiSite you can choose between the layouts: Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split  
and Voice Switched view. Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. 4 Split  
displays the 4 last speaking Participants including the MultiSite host. 5+1 Split displays the  
speaking participant in a big picture and the other participants in small pictures. Voice Switched  
mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen. Switch between these picture modes  
using the Conference Layout menu.  
Continuous Presence layout 4 split  
Advanced Continuous Presence Layout (5+1).  
Voice Switched mode  
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.12.3 Terminal Names  
Choose Terminal Names to see a list of the participants of the MultiSite conference. Press Cancel  
to go back.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.12.4 Chair Control  
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU or MultiSite)  
As chairman, you have access to more MultiSite Services. Select Chair Control to assume the  
role of chairman of the conference. Select Release Chair to end the role as chairman. A Chair  
indicator appears when you have Chair and disappears when chair is released.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.12.5 Assign Floor and Release Floor from  
Participant  
Assign Floor allows the chairman to select which of the conference participants are to be  
broadcasted to all other participants.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.12.6 View Site and End View  
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU or MultiSite)  
View Site allows you to view any participant in the conference regardless of who has the floor and  
chair. Choose End View to go back to normal.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant  
Disconnect Participant allows the chairman to disconnect any participant in the conference. In a  
multipoint call, this is equivalent to disconnecting a participant from the end call menu.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.12.8 Terminate Meeting  
Terminate Meeting allows the chairman to terminate the conference altogether. In a MultiSite call,  
this is equivalent to pressing End All Calls from the end call menu.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU)  
(Optional Feature*)  
Calling in to a MultiSite  
Any system can be part of a MultiSite conference by calling in to a MultiSite. The dial-in numbers  
to the MultiSite depends of the network that is used.  
To dial in to the MultiSite on IP:  
ƒ
Dial the IP Number or the IP Address of the system. All sites can dial the same number.  
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-PRI:  
Dial the ISDN number of the system. All sites can dial the same number.  
ƒ
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-BRI:  
ƒ
The MultiSite has specific numbers for each call that participates in the conference. To  
find the dial-in numbers for the MultiSite, choose Information from the Menu and open  
System Information from the bottom menu line.  
Site 2 must dial MultiSite Number 2.  
Site 3 must dial MultiSite Number 3.  
Site 4 must dial MultiSite Number 4.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
And so forth  
Receiving calls to a MultiSite  
When the MultiSite receives incoming calls you can accept or reject it. Pressing the green key is  
equivalent to pressing Accept. Pressing the red key is equivalent to pressing Reject.  
End a MultiSite Call  
Ending a MultiSite Call is not very different from ending a normal point-to-point call. Use the red  
key on the remote control or End Call from the Menu. The end call menu lists all the calls that  
participate in the conference. To end a single call, select the call, press OK or the red key on the  
remote control. To end all calls, press the End All Calls button in the menu.  
Duo Video in MultiSite calls  
In a MultiSite call, the MultiSite can transmit the Duo Video and/or H.239 to the other participants  
that support Duo Video and/or H.239. This means that any participant can send Dual Stream and  
the MultiSite will transmit it to the other participants. The participants that do not support Duo  
Video or H.239 will only receive Main Video or only the dual stream dependent on software  
options installed.  
Mix ISDN/IP  
A conference can consist of any combination of ISDN/IP sites.  
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
3.12.10 Text Chat  
While in an ISDN or IP call to another system supporting Text Chat (T.140), select Text Chat the  
Services Menu. Enter text in the displayed window.  
How to use Text Chat:  
1. Choose Text Chat from the Services Menu to open the Text Chat window.  
2. Enter text with the number keys like on a mobile phone. The text is sent to the far end  
continuously letter by letter.  
3. Press OK to end Text Chat and escape from the text chat window.  
Note that Text Chat is supported in point to point calls only.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
4 Control Panel  
The Control Panel contains the features:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
User Guide  
Diagnostics  
Audio Demo  
Restart  
Settings*  
Settings:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
General  
Call Quality  
Security  
Menu Settings  
Audio  
Network  
Presentation Settings  
Video  
Restore Default Settings  
NOTE: If Administrator Password is On, a Settings button will appear on the menu line together  
with User Guide, Diagnostics, Audio Demo and Restart. When you press the Setting button you  
are prompted with a password message box. For more information, see Control Panel – Security  
– Administrator Password.  
* This field is only visible if the Administrator Password is On.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
4.1 User Guide  
The on screen user guide takes you through a quick step-by-step introduction to the video  
system. It gives the user basic skills in how to use the system.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
4.2 Diagnostics  
Diagnostics allows testing of individual system components and displays the current system  
settings.  
Diagnostics contain:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System Information  
Channel Status  
Call Status  
System Selftest  
View Settings  
IP Address Conflict Check  
Warnings  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
4.2.1  
System Information  
Select System Information to view system numbers, line status, software version, hardware serial  
number and other useful information. Press arrow key up and down to scroll in the System  
Information list.  
System Information contains:  
System Name  
My ISDN Number  
My IP Number  
Software Version  
Internal Test  
Software  
Network  
Lines active  
Lines not active  
Hardware Serial  
Number  
MAC address  
Ethernet Speed  
My IP Address  
Options installed  
MultiSite number 2  
MultiSite number 3  
Note that the serial number is also found on a sticker on the system. It is essential for  
identifying the system when it comes to service contracts or other support activities. The serial  
number format is xx.xxxxx.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
4.2.2  
Channel Status  
Comprehensive information about the call progress is available through the Channel Status  
window. This window indicates the various stages each B-channel goes through whilst  
establishing a connection.  
Status -  
BRI  
Comments  
Idle  
the channel is idle  
Calling  
Connected  
Sync  
when calling — the network has acknowledged the call  
when connection is established  
when the channels are synchronized  
Active  
Releasing  
Released  
when all available channels are connected  
waiting for the network to confirm a release of the call  
when disconnected - the network has acknowledged the disconnection  
Cause codes  
The most common cause codes (for ISDN) are:  
1
2
Unallocated (unassigned) number  
No route to specified transit network (WAN)  
Normal clearing  
User busy  
No user responding  
Call rejected  
Invalid number format (incomplete number)  
Facility rejected  
Normal, unspecified  
No circuit/channel available  
Temporary failure  
Bearer capability not presently available  
Bearer service not implemented  
Requested facility not implemented  
Invalid call reference value  
Incompatible destination  
16  
17  
18  
21  
28  
29  
31  
34  
41  
58  
65  
69  
81  
88  
100 Invalid information element contents  
102 Recovery on timer expiry  
127 Internetworking, unspecified  
255 TANDBERG specific. undefined cause code  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
4.2.3  
Call Status  
Comprehensive information about the call is available through the Call Status window. The menu  
has two columns, one for transmitted and one for received audio/video/data information. If Dual  
Stream or MultiSite is available on your system and in use, pressing the UP/DOWN keys will  
show one page per connected site. Some of the information fields will vary dependent on if H.320  
(ISDN calls) or H.323 (IP calls) are made.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
4.2.4  
System Selftest  
The system performs a check to determine internal hardware integrity. System Selftest is useful  
when you want to check if your network connection is active.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
4.2.5  
View Settings  
This window displays all the system settings. Use the arrow key on the remote control to scroll  
through the list.  
View Settings may contain*:  
General Settings  
System Name  
Language  
Dual Monitor  
Auto answer  
Max Call Length  
Access Code  
Incoming MCU calls  
Incoming Telephone calls  
Far End Control  
Fallback to Telephony  
Screen Settings  
TV Monitor Format  
Picture Layout  
VGA Monitor Format  
VGA Out Quality  
PC Picture Format  
Allow VGA 50Hz  
Software Options  
Menu Settings  
Options Installed  
Serial Number  
Current Option Key  
Menu Timeout in Call  
Welcome Menu  
Welcome Picture  
Logo  
Balloon Help  
Display Welcome Text  
Welcome Text  
Administrator Password  
Presentation Settings  
Duo Video Mode  
Start up Video Source  
Presentation Source  
Snapshot Source  
Auto Display Snapshot  
PIP Placing  
H.323 Presentation Rate  
VNC Settings  
Address  
Display Number  
Call Quality  
Video Algorithm  
Audio Algorithm  
Interlaced  
Video Quality  
Main Camera  
PC  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Document Camera  
VCR  
AUX  
VNC  
Split Screen  
Default Call Settings  
Call Type  
Network  
Bandwidth  
Restrict (56k)  
Auto H320 Bandwidth  
Auto H323 Bandwidth  
SIP  
Audio Settings  
Inputs  
Mic1  
Mic2  
Mic3  
Audio4  
Audio5  
Audio6  
Mix Mode  
VCR Ducking  
Level Settings  
Outputs  
Mic1  
Mic2  
Mic3  
Audio4  
Audio5  
Audio6  
Out1  
Out2 (AUX)  
Out3 (VCR)  
Out1 Mode  
Level Settings  
Echo Control  
Out1  
Out2 (AUX)  
Out3 (VCR)  
Mic1  
Mic2  
Mic3  
Audio4  
Audio Levelling (AGC)  
Alert Tones & Volume  
Mics  
Audio5 (AUX)  
Audio6 (VCR)  
Received Audio  
Video Call Alert Tone  
Telephone Alert Tone  
Alert Volume  
Alert Speaker  
Key Tones  
Video Settings  
Picture Control  
Camera Tracking Mode  
MCU Status Line  
Web Snapshot  
MultiSite Picture Mode  
Focus  
White balance  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Brightness  
Video Name  
Main Cam  
AUX  
Doc Cam  
VCR  
PC  
VGA  
VNC  
Network Type  
ISDN-BRI\PRI\Leased E1\T1\External  
H331  
ISDN Switch Type ETSI (Euro ISDN)  
Line1 Setup On  
Number1  
Number2  
SPID1  
SPID2  
Line2 Setup On  
Number1  
Number2  
SPID1  
SPID2  
Line3 Setup On  
Number1  
Number2  
SPID1  
SPID2  
Advanced ISDN Settings  
Sub Address  
Validate Numbers (MSN)  
Parallel Dial  
Send Own Numbers  
Sending Complete  
ISDN-PRI Settings  
Channel Hunting  
Number Range  
ISDN-PRI Switch Type  
Max Channels  
Low Channel  
High Channel  
Search High, Low  
Line Settings:  
T1 Cable Length 1  
E1 CRC-4  
Advanced ISDN PRI Settings  
Leased E1/T1 Settings  
NSF Code Video  
NSF Code Telephone Call  
Call Control  
Network Interface  
Max Channels  
Start Channels  
T1 Line Coding  
Line Settings  
External network configuration Call Control RS66  
RS449/V.35 Compatible  
IP Settings  
IP assignment  
IP address  
IP subnet mask  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Gateway  
Ethernet Speed  
DNS Settings  
H.323 Settings  
E.164 Alias  
Use Gatekeeper  
Gatekeeper IP  
H.323 Prefix  
Advanced H.323 Settings  
IP Precedence  
RSVP  
NAT  
NAT Address  
QoS  
Audio  
Video  
Data  
Signaling  
IP Type of Service (TOS)  
Diffserv  
Audio  
Video  
Data  
Signaling  
IEEE802.1x Settings  
IEEE802.1x  
Mode  
Anonymous Identity  
Identity  
EAP-MD5  
EAP-TTLS  
EAP-PEAP  
SNMP Settings  
IP Services  
SNMP Trap Host1  
SNMP Trap Host2  
SNMP Trap Host3  
SNMP Community  
IP Services  
HTTPS  
NTP IP  
IP Address  
Streaming Settings  
Address  
Address Port  
TTL/Router Hops  
Streaming Source  
Allow Remote Start  
Announcements  
Video rate (kbps)  
Network Profiles  
Auto  
H.320  
H.323  
Network Profile 4  
Network Profile 5  
Network Profile 6  
Security  
Encryption  
Encryption mode  
Passwords  
Camera Standby Mode  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Data Port 1  
Baud rate  
Parity  
Databits  
Stopbits  
Mode  
Data Port 2  
Baud rate  
Parity  
Databits  
Stopbits  
Mode  
* The settings available will vary within the MXP system range depending on system and what software options installed.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
4.2.6  
IP Address Conflict Check  
The system will give a warning if there is an IP conflict. The user may initiate this check by  
selecting IP Address Conflict Check.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
4.2.7  
Warnings  
Any warnings registered by the system will be displayed in the Warnings menu. Open a warning  
in the list to get more information about the warning.  
The following warnings may be displayed if detected by the system, depending on system type  
and configuration:  
ISDN BRI warnings  
ƒ
ISDN is enabled on BRI line x, but the line is not connected. Please check your network  
connection or disable the line. (101)  
ƒ
There is something wrong with ISDN BRI line x. Please check your network connection.  
(102)  
IP network quality warnings  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The system is experiencing, equal to or more than 5%, packet loss in the IP network.  
This may affect the quality of the call.  
The system is experiencing high jitter, equal to or more than 200 ms, in the IP network.  
This may affect the quality of the call.  
The system is dropping IP packets due to latency in the network. This may affect the  
quality of the call.  
ISDN PRI warnings  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ISDN PRI is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check your  
network connection or disable the network. (131)  
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Blue alarm). Please check your  
network connection. (132)  
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Yellow alarm). Please check your  
network connection. (133)  
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (D-Channel not active). Please check  
your network connection. (134)  
External Network warnings  
External Network is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please  
check your network connection or disable the network. (161)  
ƒ
Leased E1/T1 warnings  
Leased E1/T1 is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check  
ƒ
your network connection or disable the network. (191)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
ƒ
ƒ
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Blue alarm). Please check your  
network connection. (192)  
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Yellow alarm). Please check your  
network connection. (193)  
H323 gatekeeper warnings  
ƒ
ƒ
Could not register to the gatekeeper.  
The gatekeeper rejected to register the system. Another system is already registered with  
the same alias or H.323 ID.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The max capacity on the gatekeeper is reached. Registration failed.  
Tried to register to the gatekeeper without a valid alias. Registration failed.  
The system is not allowed to register with this gatekeeper.  
Can not find the gatekeeper. Check the gatekeeper configurations on the system.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
4.3 Audio Demo  
TANDBERG systems are designed to improve audio quality during a video conference – as if the  
person is in the same room!  
Demonstrate the high quality Audio of your system by pressing the Audio Demo button at the  
bottom of the Control Panel menu. Lean back and enjoy!  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
4.4 Restart  
Restart the system by pressing the Restart button. You are prompted with a dialog box saying:  
Do you want to restart the system? Press OK to restart, press Cancel (X) to abort.  
You will also find the Restart button at the bottom of the Control Panel menu. Select the Restart  
button and press ok on the remote control.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 System Settings  
The Control Panel contains all the settings of the system. Making changes to the settings will  
change the behavior of the system. It is recommended to password protect the access to the  
settings to prevent occasional users from making crucial changes to the system, see Control  
Panel – Security – Administrator Password.  
NOTE: The System Settings can be password protected by setting an Administrator Password.  
The settings are hidden and a settings button appears on the menu line. Whenever you press the  
Settings button you will be prompted to enter a five digit pin code to access the Settings menu.  
System Settings contain:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
General  
Menu Settings  
Presentation Settings  
Call Quality  
Audio  
Video  
Security  
Network  
Restore Default Settings  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.1 General Settings  
When installing the system, go through the General Settings menu to ensure that you have the  
right settings for your system, see System Configuration.  
General Settings contain:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Language  
System Name / International Name*  
Auto Answer  
Phone Book Settings  
External Service Settings  
Permissions  
Screen Settings  
Software Options  
Date and Time Settings  
* This field is only visible if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.1.1  
Language  
The system supports 16 different languages for its on-screen menus; English, German, French,  
Norwegian, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian, Finnish, Chinese Simplified, Chinese  
Traditional, Japanese, Korean, Thai and Arabic. Select the preferred language and press OK to  
save.  
Note that pressing the Phone Book button 5 times followed by the number button 1 on the remote  
control will reset the menu language to English.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.1.2  
System Name  
System Name identifies the system:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
On the welcome page.  
During an MCU conference call.  
When using the Web-interface.  
When the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent.  
Towards a DHCP server.  
H323 ID. Other systems can call in using this name instead of IP-number/IP-address.  
System Name is blank by default. System name can be alphanumeric and up to 50 characters  
long. Follow the installation procedure to enter a System Name.  
Note that if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input, the  
International Name using Latin characters only, must be specified as well.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.1.3  
International Name  
If the System Name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input, the International Name  
using Latin characters only, must be specified as well. This is in order to make other systems  
understand the system name.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.1.4  
Auto Answer  
The auto answer setting decides whether an incoming call is put through automatically or  
manually.  
On  
The system will automatically answer all incoming calls.  
On+Mic  
Off  
The system will automatically answer all incoming calls and switch the  
microphone off when the call is connected. Press Mic Off to switch the  
microphone on.  
Off  
You must manually answer all incoming calls by pressing OK or the Call key.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.1.5  
Phone Book Settings  
Corporate Directory  
On  
Off  
The Corporate Directory is available in the menu.  
The Corporate Directory is hidden from the menu and is unavailable for users.  
IP address  
Enter the IP address of the management system that provides the Phone Book.  
Path  
The Path indicates the function of the management system.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.1.6  
External Services Settings  
External Services  
On  
Off  
When set to On External Services are available.  
When set to Off External Services are unavailable.  
IP address  
Enter the IP address of the service provider for External Services.  
Path  
Enter the Path to the External Services provider.  
The services available are defined by the service provider.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.1.7  
Permissions  
Permissions contains settings for incoming MCU Calls, incoming telephone Calls, Far End  
Control, Remote Software Upgrade and Fallback to Telephony.  
Access Code  
An access code will help you control the use of the system. All users must enter a code to identify  
themselves and the call will be charged on their account. Access Codes are handy for group  
systems where there are more users or divisions that share the costs of using the system. Access  
Code can be set to "On" and "Off". Please refer to section Appendix 5 for more information on  
Access codes.  
On  
Off  
When making a call, an Access Code dialog box will be shown. The user must enter  
the correct password in order to put the call through.  
No password is necessary to make a call.  
Incoming MCU Calls  
On  
Off  
When you are in a call, the system will provide visual and audible indications of an  
incoming call and ask you to accept/reject the call.  
The system will not accept incoming calls when you are in a call.  
Incoming Telephone Calls  
On  
Off  
The system will accept incoming telephone calls.  
The system will not accept incoming telephone calls. This is useful to prevent  
incoming calls from systems other than videoconferencing systems.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Far End Camera Control  
On  
The far end will be able to:  
• Control your camera  
• Select your video sources  
• Activate your camera presets  
• Request snapshots  
Off  
The far end can access none of the four features above on the local system. You will  
however still be able to control the camera on the far end.  
Fallback to Telephony  
When dialing a number and the system fails to place a video call to the number dialed, the  
system will attempt to place a telephone call if Fallback to Telephony is enabled.  
On  
Off  
Enables fallback from video calls to telephone calls.  
Disables fallback.  
Far End ISDN System Upgrade  
It is possible to upgrade software remotely, i.e. a far end system may upgrade software on a local  
system via http on ISDN. The system to be upgraded must be configured to allow remote  
software upgrade. It is possible to set a password which is needed for the far end system to be  
able to accomplish the software upgrade.  
On  
Off  
The system will allow a remote system to upgrade local software.  
The system will not allow a remote system to upgrade local software.  
Note that the configuration can also be done via the telnet or the serial port.  
Maximum Call Length (minutes)  
This feature will automatically end both incoming and outgoing calls when the call time exceeds  
the specified Max Call Length. Max Call Length can have the following values: 0-999 (minutes),  
where 0 means off.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.1.8  
Screen Settings  
Auto Layout  
On  
If Auto Layout is On the system will change layouts automatically depending on the  
number of participants in a call and if you have a dual video stream or not. Please  
refer to Layout for more information.  
Off  
If Auto Layout is Off there will be no automatic layout changes during a call. All  
desired layout changes must be done manually.  
Note that when you receive low resolution images (176x144 pixels or less) the screen will  
automatically adjust to a smaller view to give optimum quality experience.  
Use Screen as Local PC Monitor  
Use the Selfview button to switch from local PC display to standard conference layout.  
On  
Off  
If Local PC Display is On you will be able to have Local PC displayed both outside  
a call and in a call.  
If Local PC Display is Off you will not be able to see a Local PC image.  
Note that this applies to single monitor systems only.  
Please refer to Local PC Display for more information.  
Dual Monitor  
TANDBERG systems can be used with both one and two monitors. If you use two monitors, make  
sure that Dual Monitor is set to "On".  
On  
Off  
Selfview, snapshots and Dual Stream will be displayed on the second monitor.  
The second monitor shows selfview only.  
Picture Layout  
The Advanced Picture Layout is related to the Layout button on the remote control and it can be  
used at any time to change the screen layout. For wide screen systems POP mode is  
recommended. You will get optimized picture layouts for wide screen by pressing the Layout  
button on the remote.  
Picture in  
Pressing the Layout button on the remote will result in an extra picture in  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Picture (PIP)  
smaller view (Picture in Picture). Press the Layout button to move it around  
in the corners of the screen and finally hide it. Pressing and holding Layout  
for 1 second will hide the small picture directly from any position.  
Picture  
outside  
Picture  
(POP)  
Press the Layout button to see the images side-by-side, e.g. 1+1 layout,  
where the far end and near end are displayed as images of equal size, see  
figure below.  
Press the Layout button once more to change to 1+2 layout. The far end  
image will be displayed as the main video, with the near end, usually the  
user of the system, as a smaller image in the upper right corner. If Duo  
Stream is used, the Dual Stream image is displayed as the main image and  
the far end and near end as smaller images to the right, see figure below for  
an example.  
Press the Layout button again to get the 1+3 layout.  
The next time the Layout button is pressed, the normal full screen view of  
the far end is displayed. Pressing and holding Layout for 1 second will  
always bring you back to full screen.  
Example of Picture in Picture.  
Example of 1+1 Side-by-Side view (wide screen).  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Example of 1+2 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).  
Example of 1+3 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).  
Note that if both TV monitor format and VGA format is set to Normal, the system will skip the  
1+3 layout, which is not beneficial for 4:3 monitors.  
Note that the following menu settings do not apply for all TANDBERG MXP systems. Please  
refer to the actual menu page on your system.  
TV Monitor Format (wide screen monitors only)  
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the TV  
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your TV monitor is a  
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. All composite- and s-video output formats will then be  
optimized for Wide Screen TV monitors.  
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal TV monitors (4:3)  
Wide  
Output format is optimized for Wide TV monitors (16:9)  
VGA Monitor Format  
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the VGA  
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your VGA monitor is a  
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. The VGA and DVI output will then be optimized for Wide  
Screen VGA and High Definition (HD) display.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal VGA monitors (4:3)  
Wide  
Output format is optimized for Wide VGA monitors (16:9)  
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor in Normal (stretched) mode.  
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor In Wide (native) mode.  
VGA Out Mode  
VGA Out Mode makes it possible to specify which signal to send to the VGA/DVI output.  
Main  
Dual  
Should be used if you want to use a VGA monitor as your main monitor.  
Should be used if you want to use a VGA monitor as your dual monitor.  
VGA Out Quality  
The supported range of VGA formats will be optimized for the VGA display monitor based on the  
source image.  
VGA Out Quality enables the user to change the preferred format for the DVI/VGA output. It is  
recommended to keep this setting in Auto unless your screen doesn’t support some of the XGA  
or SVGA formats the system is using. Note that the VGA Out port support VESA Power  
Management.  
Auto  
VGA output format will be optimized dependant of the video source format,  
refresh and of the EDID information available.  
Supported formats are:  
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz  
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz / 75Hz  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz  
SVGA 800x600  
75Hz  
VGA output format is forced to SVGA format (800x600) 75Hz  
VGA output format is forced to XGA format (1024x768) 60Hz  
XGA 1024x768  
60Hz  
VGA Out Quality for Wide XGA:  
If VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide, PC Picture Format is set to Normal, VGA Out Quality is  
set to Auto, the layout on the monitor is either fullscreen or POP, and the input source to the  
largest window is PC with resolution 1024x768, the system will use WideXGA (1280x768)  
instead of XGA, when the monitor supports this.  
PC Picture Format (wide screen monitors only)  
PC Picture Format setting only takes effect when TV or VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide. Use  
this setting to determine if you want your PC presentations to be shown stretched in full screen,  
or with correct aspect ratio using part of the widescreen display. With the VGA Out Quality set to  
Auto the presentation will be of the best possible quality supported by the monitor.  
Normal VGA output will have 4:3 aspect ratio on wide screen monitor.  
Wide  
VGA output will utilize the wide screen monitor at full.  
PC presentation shown in Normal (correct ratio) mode.  
PC Presentation shown in Wide (stretched) mode.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.1.9  
Software Options  
The system requires a valid option key to activate MultiSite and/or Presenter functionality. In  
order to activate additional bandwidth, you need to enter a bandwidth key. A restart of the system  
is required after entering a new option and/or bandwidth keys. If the key is invalid, the original key  
will be used.  
The following options are available:  
1. No option  
2. Presenter  
3. MultiSite + Presenter  
4. Bandwidth options  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.1.10 Date and Time Settings  
NTP IP  
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.  
See IP Services for more details.  
Auto  
The NTP IP will be provided by the DHCP server.  
Manual The NTP IP address is set manually.  
IP Address  
The IP Address for obtaining the date and time information.  
Time Zone  
Select the correct time zone for the location of your system.  
Date Format  
Choose between DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/YY, or YY/MM/DD as the desired date format.  
Time Format  
Select 12h or 24h time format.  
Daylight Savings  
On  
Off  
Moves the time 1 hour ahead.  
Moves the time 1 hour back.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.2 Menu Settings  
Menu Settings contain the settings:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Input Editor Language  
Menu Timeout In Call  
Menu on TV  
Menu on PC  
Balloon Help  
Number Key Mode  
Administrator Password  
Kiosk Mode Settings  
Startup  
Icons  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.2.1  
Input Editor Language  
When the Input Editor Language is set to Chinese, Korean or Japanese the user will be able to  
enter Chinese / Korean / Japanese characters into an input field like the System Name or Phone  
Book, using the remote control.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.2.2  
Menu Timeout In Call  
The Menu appears on the bottom line of the screen. Set Menu Timeout In Call to On if you want  
the menu to time out automatically when you are in a call.  
On  
The menus will time out automatically after 15 seconds if there is no activity on the  
remote control. Menu timeout does only apply when you are in a call. Outside a call,  
the menu will not time out.  
Off  
The menu will not time out automatically. Press Cancel (X) to hide the Menu  
manually.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.2.3  
Menu on TV  
The Menu on TV setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the TV screen or not. For  
optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice versa.  
On  
Off  
The menu is available on the TV screen.  
The menu is not available on the TV screen.  
Note that if the menu has disappeared from the connected monitor or PC screen and only one of  
them is connected to the system, it is possible to press the Phone Book 5 times and then the  
number button 2 in order to display the menu on the connected screen.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.2.4  
Menu on PC  
The Menu on PC setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the PC (VGA screen) screen  
or not. For optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice  
versa.  
On  
Off  
The menu is available on the PC screen.  
The menu is not available on the PC screen.  
Note that if the menu has disappeared from the connected monitor or PC screen and only one of  
them is connected to the system, it is possible to press the Phone Book 5 times and then the  
number button 2 in order to display the menu on the connected screen.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.2.5  
Balloon Help  
It is possible to enable / disable the balloon help window.  
On  
Off  
Choose On if you want help text windows to appear.  
There will be no help text window.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.2.6  
Number Key Mode  
When pressing a number key on the remote control, while in a call, the user can decide what  
shall happen. The system can be configured to act automatic or manual.  
While in a call, the user presses a number key to:  
add another call  
dial extension numbers  
use camera presets  
Setting Number Key to Automatic:  
Some users want the camera presets as the default action when pressing a number key, when in  
a call. The number keys can be configured to always act like this; or to act in accordance to any  
of the other available choices.  
Setting Number Key to Manual:  
Sometimes, when you are in a call, you need to switch between adding another call, dial  
extension numbers or use camera presets. Then you would want the system to give you a choice  
of what to do. If you configure the Number Key Mode to Manual you can select the preferred  
action when pressing a number key.  
The Number Key Mode are available from Menu Settings and the default setting is Manual. See  
Control Panel – Menu Settings – Number Key Mode.  
TIP: You can always press “Touch Tones” on the remote control to enter an extension number,  
password or access code while in a call.  
The Number Key Mode is set to Manual  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Settings for Remote Control Number Keys while in a call:  
Add Call  
While in a call, the Call Menu will automatically appear when a number key is  
pressed on the remote control.  
This will enable the user to add another call.  
Touch tones  
While in a call, the Touch Tones Mode will automatically become active when a  
number key is pressed on the remote control.  
This will enable the user to dial extension numbers, access codes, passwords,  
etc.  
Presets  
While in a call, the Camera Preset Mode will automatically become active when a  
number key is pressed on the remote control.  
The camera will move to the position preset for the number key used. If users  
want the system to behave like before, set the setting to “Presets”.  
Manual  
(default)  
While in a call, the Number Menu will appear every time the number key is  
pressed on remote control. The user can choose between the options available,  
dependent of the system.  
For more information, see chapter, 3.2.8.2 Manual Number Key Mode.  
5.2.6.1 Manual Number Key Mode  
The pop-up menu will look slightly different based on the options installed at the system and  
whether you have stored camera presets or not.  
Press a number key, while in a call, when having MultiSite and stored presets:  
A dialog box appears offering the options:  
Add a Call  
Dial Extension Number -> Go to Touch Tones Mode  
Use Presets -> Go to Camera Presets mode  
-> Go to Call menu  
Press arrow key to navigate in the list. Press OK on the remote control to select the desired entry.  
Presets mode:  
If you have selected Use Presets, you put the system in Preset mode. That means that all  
number key presses will select presets. An indicator text says “Select Presets 0-9. Press OK  
when done”.  
Press a number key while in a call, when having MultiSite but no stored presets:  
A dialog box appears offering the options:  
Add a Call  
-> Go to Call menu  
Dial Extension Number -> Go to Touch Tones Mode  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
If you have no stored presets on your system, you are likely not to use presets. Therefore the  
presets option is not present in the dialog box. Press arrow key to navigate in the list. Press OK  
on the remote control to select the desired entry.  
Press a number key while in a call, when having no MultiSite and having stored presets:  
A dialog box appears offering the options:  
Dial Extension Number -> Go to Touch Tones Mode  
Use Presets -> Go to Camera Presets mode  
If you don’t have MultiSite (or you have used all your MultiSite capacity), the Add Call option is  
not present in the dialog box. Press arrow key to navigate in the list. Press OK on the remote  
control to select the desired entry.  
Press a number key while in a call, when having no MultiSite and no stored presets:  
You go directly to Touch Tones Mode because no other options are available. In Touch Tones  
Mode (DTMF) the user can dial extension numbers, access codes, passwords, etc.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.2.7  
Administrator Password  
It is recommended to put an Administrator Password on the system. The Administrator Password  
can be maximum 5 digits long.  
The Administrator Password dialog box will pop up when you choose Settings from the Control  
Panel. This will prevent occasional users from going in to system settings.  
With an administrator password, you can ensure that your system will behave in the same way  
every time and that only approved people are allowed to make changes to the system.  
The Control Panel will look like this when Administrator Password is set:  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.2.8  
Kiosk Mode Settings  
Kiosk Mode  
In Kiosk Mode the system is set to a simplified state where it can be controlled with just the four  
arrow keys and OK. You will get a simplified on-screen menu with only basic functionality  
available:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
make calls (using predefined contacts in the phone book)  
receive calls  
end calls  
adjust volume  
NOTE! Deactivating the Kiosk Mode is only possible through:  
The web interface, telnet or data port, or  
By pressing 5 times on the Phone Book symbol then once on the number 3 on the  
Remote Control. Requires that “Allow Use of Remote Control” is set to On.  
Using Kiosk Mode  
Outside a call the Welcome Menu will be displayed:  
Place a Call, Volume and Close.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
If Language Menu is enabled you will first see the language selection menu. Select language and  
the Welcome Menu will be displayed with your desired language.  
In a call, the system will display Far End video in full screen. If Max Call Length is set to a value  
and the system is in a call, the system will display a warning when it is 5 minutes, 1 minute and  
10 seconds left of the call. If pressing OK when the system is in a call, the following menu will be  
displayed: End Call, Volume and Close.  
The following Kiosk Mode settings allows you to make some adjustments to the system's  
behavior in Kiosk Mode.  
Kiosk Mode - Language Menu  
On  
Off  
When On the system will display the language menu as the first menu in kiosk mode.  
When Off the system will display the welcome menu in English (default).  
Kiosk Mode - Available Languages  
In Kiosk Mode the system supports 7 different languages for its simplified on-screen menu;  
English, German, French, Norwegian, Swedish, Italian and Spanish. Select the preferred  
language.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Kiosk Mode - Auto Dial*  
On  
The system will automatically dial to the first contact in the Phone Book when he  
handset is lifted. If this contact is busy, the system will call the second number in the  
Phone Book and so on. If the user places the handset in the cradle, the system will  
switch to Speaker Mode. Only the Far End system can end the call.  
Off  
The system will not make a call automatically when the handset is lifted.  
* Applies only to systems with handset  
Kiosk Mode - Allow Use of Remote Control  
Yes All keys on the remote control are enabled.  
No  
All keys except the arrow keys and OK key are disabled.  
Kiosk Mode - Phone Book  
Local  
The system will use the Local Phone Book in Kiosk Mode.  
Corporate  
The system will use the Corporate Directory in Kiosk Mode.  
Kiosk Mode - Kiosk Menu  
On  
The Kiosk Mode menus will appear on the screen.  
Off  
No menus or indicators will appear on the screen.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.2.9  
Startup  
Welcome Menu  
The Welcome Menu contains the Menu, System Status, your System Name and dial in numbers.  
On  
Off  
The Welcome Menu is shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.  
The Welcome Menu is not shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.  
Press the OK button to open the welcome menu.  
Welcome Picture  
The Welcome Picture is what you see in the background of the welcome menu.  
Selfview  
Off  
Selfview is shown in the background of the welcome menu. In most cases this  
means that main camera is displayed and you can see the video image of  
yourself.  
No picture is shown in the background of the welcome menu.  
Logo  
It is possible to upload a company logo to the system. For more information about how to upload  
a Logo, see Appendix 6. Set the Logo settings to On to display the logo.  
On  
Off  
Choose On if you want the company logo to appear in the background of the  
welcome menu.  
The logo is not displayed.  
Note: The TANDBERG Logo will be displayed if no other company logo is loaded and logo is  
enabled.  
Display Welcome Text  
The welcome text displays your system name and dial in numbers by default. It is possible to hide  
this information by choosing Display Welcome Text Off.  
On  
Welcome text is displayed on the welcome menu.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Off  
Welcome text is not displayed on the welcome menu.  
Welcome Text  
You can change the welcome text to any text you like, instead of the default text. Remember that  
Display Welcome Text must be On to be able to edit the welcome text.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.2.10 Icons  
The following indicator icons may be set to on or off:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Mic Off  
Volume Off  
On Air  
Encryption  
Bad Network  
Telephone  
DuoVideo/H.239  
See On-screen Indicators for details.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.3 Presentation Settings  
Presentation Settings contain:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Presentation Start  
H.239  
Startup Video Source  
Presentation Source  
Snapshot Source  
Auto-Display Snapshot  
PIP Placing  
Presentation Rate  
VNC Settings  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.3.1  
Presentation Start  
If your system has Dual Stream capabilities, you can show two video streams at the same time  
(see also Dual Stream). Presentation Start is Auto by default. This means that you will start Dual  
Stream (a second video stream) automatically when starting a presentation. Dual Stream requires  
the Presenter Option and H.263 video. To check which options are installed, see the System  
Information menu in Control Panel.  
Manual means that you manually choose if you want to start Duo Video or not every time you  
start a presentation.  
Auto  
Dual Stream starts automatically when you start a presentation (in other words,  
when you choose a second video source). If your system or the far end system is  
not capable of Duo Video/H.239, you will not use Dual Stream, but rather send the  
presentation source as your Main Video  
Manual When starting a presentation, select Presentation in the call menu and select Start  
Presentation. Choose a video source from the list displayed on the screen.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.3.2  
H.239  
H.239 supports transmission of two video streams. It combines elements of Duo Video and  
People+Content. If H.239 is disabled you will still be able to start TANDBERG Dual Video  
Stream*  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enables H.239  
Disables H.239  
* The TANDBERG 550 MXP can only receive Dual Video Stream.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.3.3  
Startup Video Source  
The Startup Video Source is the video source on display when the system wakes up from  
standby mode. If you use Main Camera as start up source, the system will start with Main  
Camera every time the system wakes up from standby, regardless of what the previous user was  
using.  
You can change Startup Video Source to Main Camera, PC, Document Camera, VCR, AUX,  
VNC or Current depending on what video sources you have available for your system. Choosing  
Current will result in the last used video source before the system went to standby.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.3.4  
Presentation Source  
The Presentation Source is connected to the Presentation button on the remote. Pressing the  
Presentation button will put the Presentation Source on display. Presentation Source is PC by  
default*. You can change the Presentation Source to any video source and none. Choosing none  
results in opening the Presentation menu when pressing the Presentation key.  
* Only for systems with the PC video input available.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.3.5  
Snapshot Source  
When you take a Snapshot, you get a snapshot of the Snapshot Source. Current is the default  
Snapshot Source. This means that you take a snapshot of the video source that is currently  
active.  
You can change the Snapshot Source to any video source. In this way you can program the  
snapshot key to apply only for PC for instance. Press Snapshot and you will take a PC snapshot  
regardless of what video source that is currently active.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.3.6  
Auto-Display Snapshot  
Select Auto to automatically display a received snapshot. Turn Auto-Display Snapshot Manual if  
you wish not to have them displayed on the screen when they are sent or received. The  
snapshots will be sent and received, but not displayed. With Auto-Display Snapshot set for  
Manual, you must enter the Presentation menu to display a snapshot.  
Auto  
A sent or received snapshot will automatically be displayed on the screen.  
Manual A sent or received snapshot will not be displayed on the screen. To see the  
snapshot, choose Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.3.7  
PIP Placing  
PIP Placing lets you decide where the PIP shall appear. You can of course move the PIP with the  
Layout button on the remote anytime.  
Top Right  
PIP is placed in the Top Right corner.  
PIP is placed in the Bottom Right corner.  
PIP is placed in the Bottom Left corner.  
PIP is placed in the Top Left corner.  
Bottom  
Right  
Bottom  
Left  
Top Left  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.3.8  
Presentation Rate  
When setting up a call with H.323 the bandwidth can be controlled by the user.  
The Presentation Rate is expressed in percent of the Call Rate and shall reflect the H.323  
Presentation Rate settings of the sender.  
The settings are 25%, 50% and 75% of the total available video stream.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.3.9  
VNC Settings  
VNC Settings is necessary when using a VNC presentation. Please see chapter, PC Soft  
Presenter and VNC, for more information on how to use VNC.  
Address  
The IP-address of the PC with the VNC software installed. To find the IP-  
address of the PC, place the mouse pointer on the VNC program icon in the  
lower right corner of the Windows taskbar. You can also select Command  
Prompt from the Startup-menu\Run and type cmd then enter. This will open a  
command window and from here. Type “ipconfig” and press enter.  
Display  
Number  
The display number for VNC is 0 and upwards. If you are using WinVNC,  
double-click on the icon on the taskbar to view WinVNC properties. This  
number should correspond with Display Number in this menu.  
Password  
Enter the same password as specified in WinVNC properties. The password  
will be shown as asterisk signs (*) the next time you enter the menu.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.4 Call Quality  
Call Quality contains the settings:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Video Algorithm  
Audio Algorithm  
AAC-LD 128kbps  
Natural Video  
Max Upstream Rate  
Video Quality  
Default Call Settings  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.4.1  
Video Algorithm  
The system will automatically select the best video algorithm based on the video source and the  
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable video algorithms in case you have  
interoperability issues calling other systems.  
H.264  
H.263  
H.261  
Bandwidth efficient video compression and decompression.  
Normal video compression and decompression.  
Legacy video compression and decompression. The system will always have H.261  
enabled. Therefore it is impossible to uncheck H.261.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.4.2  
Audio Algorithm  
The system will automatically select the best audio algorithm based on the call rate and the  
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable audio algorithms in case you want to  
remove “low quality” audio, or if you have interoperability issues calling other systems.  
G.722  
G.728  
G.711  
High quality audio (7 kHz at 48kbps, 56kbps or 64kbps)  
Compressed normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz at 16kbps)  
Normal quality audio (telephone quality 3.1kHz at 64kbps). This audio algorithm is  
mandatory for video meeting equipment and is impossible to uncheck.  
G.722.1 Compressed high quality audio (7 kHz at 24kbps, 32kbps and 48kbps).  
AAC-  
LD  
CD-quality audio, MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding Low Delay (20 kHz, stereo at  
128kbps, mono at 64kbps).  
Call Rate vs Audio algorithms selected  
Modify/remove algorithms used by uncheck the different audio algorithms.  
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates up to and including 192kbps  
1. G.722.1 (24kbps or 32kbps)  
2. G.728 (16kbps)  
3. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)  
4. G.722 (56kbps, 64kbps or 48kbps)*  
5. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)**  
6. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)  
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates above 192kbps  
1. AAC-LD (128kbps)***  
2. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)  
3. G.722 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)*  
4. G.722.1 (32kbps or 24kbps)  
5. G.728 (16kbps)  
6. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps, 48kbps)**  
7. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)  
*
G.722 at 64kbps is used in H.323 (IP) calls only.  
** G.711 at 64kbps is used in SIP and H.323 (IP) calls only.  
*** Dependent on a call rate above the AAC-LD 128 threshold. Note that this is not available on all TANDBERG systems.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.4.3  
AAC-LD 128kbps (stereo audio)  
Specify a call rate for 128kbps AAC-LD. From this call rate and above, "128kbps AAC-LD" is  
available. On lower call rates "64kbps AAC-LD" is available.  
Stereo audio requires twice the bandwidth as mono CD-quality audio. Therefore we recommend  
to enable stereo audio on high call rates only. To enable stereo CD-quality audio you need to  
specify a call rate for when stereo automatically should be enabled. On lower call rates, mono  
CD-quality audio "64kbps AAC-LD" will be enabled. Stereo Input mode needs to be enabled to  
get stereo audio, see Stereo Settings for details.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.4.4  
Natural Video  
Choosing Natural Video will enable 60 fields* per second true interlaced picture for high motion  
video. The use of Natural Video requires the H.263+ and H.263++ video protocols. Natural video  
will be disabled in H.323 MultiSite calls and in H.320 Continuous Presence MultiSite calls.  
Auto  
When set to ‘Auto’, the MXP will prefer the H.264 400p/448p resolutions from call  
speeds between 384kbps and 1920kbps.  
For calls above 1920kbps, iSIF/iCIF video will then be preferred.  
However, if Natural Video is forced to a specific call rate (e.g. 768kbps), iCIF/iSIF  
will be preferred on all calls that match or exceed that call rate.  
When connecting to systems that do not support the new H.264 resolutions,  
Natural Video will perform as it did in previous versions.  
Off  
Natural Video Off will disable both transmission and reception of Natural Video.  
Custom 384 kbps and above to 1920 kbps and above.  
* 50 fields per second on PAL systems.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.4.5  
Max Upstream Rate (kbps)  
The Max Upstream Rate (kbps) defines the desired maximum transmitted call rate over H.323 networks.  
This is to be able to limit the outgoing (transmit) bandwidth whilst keeping the maximum incoming (receive)  
bandwidth, especially useful for home offices with different upstream (transmit) and downstream (receive)  
rates, typically ADSL.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.4.6  
Video Quality  
The different video sources need different Video Quality Settings. Main Camera, VCR, AUX and  
Split Screen have Motion as default. PC, Document Camera and VNC have Sharpness as  
default.  
Motion*  
Optimized for smooth motion video (CIF/SIF or w288p for low bandwidths,  
448p/400p, Interlaced CIF (iCIF) / Interlaced SIF (iSIF) or w448p for high  
bandwidths).  
When a Precision HD Camera is connected it will prefer: w288p for low  
bandwidths and w448p from 512kbps.  
Sharpness* Optimized for sharp video (4CIF/4SIF, SVGA, XGA, w720p).  
When a Precision HD Camera is connected it will prefer: w720p.  
Auto  
The system chooses the best of Motion or Sharpness depending on picture  
layout and bandwidth.  
5.4.6.1 Intelligent Video Management (IVM)  
It is possible to configure the picture sent from the system depending upon specific requirements  
and applications adding an additional level of flexibility and adaptability.  
Generally, the IVM will always try to transmit the format closest to the video input format. Each  
video input can be configured to either motion or sharpness:  
Motion*:  
When there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are  
present or when there is a lot of motion in the picture.  
At low bit rate:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
CIF will be used from a PAL video input  
SIF from NTSC  
w288p from wide format (HD720p) input  
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity  
At high bit rate:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
448p will be used from a PAL video input if Natural Video is ‘Off’ or ‘Auto’ or if  
Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and the bit rate is lower than x kbps  
400p from NTSC if Natural Video is ‘Off’ or ‘Auto’ or if Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and  
the bit rate is lower than x kbps  
iCIF will be used from a PAL video input, if Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and the bit  
rate is higher than or equal to x kbps  
iSIF from NTSC, if Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and the bit rate is higher than or equal  
to x kbps  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
ƒ
ƒ
w448p will be used from a wide format (HD720p) input  
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity  
Sharpness*:  
Improved quality of detailed images and graphics, lower frame rate, ideal for enhancing quality at  
lower bandwidths.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
4CIF will be used from a PAL video input, Digital Clarity  
4SIF from NTSC, Digital Clarity  
w720p will be used from a wide format (HD720p) input  
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity  
IVM Resolution  
The following table shows relationship between Transmission modes selected by the system  
when Motion or Sharpness is set in the Call Quality menu. IVM will use this table to optimize the  
Video quality, according to the capabilities of the remote system(s):  
Basic Video  
Quality  
Video Input  
Transmission mode selection rules*  
MOTION  
MOTION  
PAL  
448p -> iCIF@50 -> CIF -> QCIF  
NTSC  
400p -> 448p -> iSIF@60 -> iCIF@60 ->  
SIF -> CIF -> QCIF  
MOTION  
VGA  
448p -> CIF -> QCIF  
MOTION  
SVGA  
XGA  
448p -> CIF -> QCIF  
MOTION  
448p -> CIF -> QCIF  
MOTION  
Wide  
PAL  
w448p -> w288p -> CIF -> QCIF  
4CIF -> VGA -> CIF -> QCIF  
4SIF -> 4CIF -> VGA -> SIF -> CIF -> QCIF  
VGA -> 4CIF -> CIF -> QCIF  
SHARPNESS  
SHARPNESS  
SHARPNESS  
SHARPNESS  
NTSC  
VGA  
SVGA  
SVGA -> XGA -> 4CIF -> VGA -> CIF ->  
QCIF  
SHARPNESS  
SHARPNESS  
XGA  
Wide  
XGA -> SVGA -> 4CIF -> VGA -> CIF ->  
QCIF  
w720p -> w576p -> w448p -> w288p -> CIF  
-> QCIF  
Transmission mode with Motion or Sharpness selections.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.4.6.2 Native Resolutions  
The following live video resolutions are supported on the system*:  
Native NTSC:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity  
400p (528 x 400)  
iSIF (352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video  
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)  
Native PAL:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity  
448p (576 x 448)  
iCIF (352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video  
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)  
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)  
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels)  
Native PC Resolutions:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
XGA (1024 x 768 pixels), Digital Clarity  
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels), Digital Clarity  
VGA (640 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity  
Wide (16:9) Resolutions:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
w288p (512 x 288 pixels)  
w448p (768 x 448 pixels)  
w576p (1024 x 576 pixels)  
w720p (1280 x 720 pixels)  
* Note that the TANDBERG 550 MXP and the TANDBERG 1000 MXP do not transmit the following video formats: 448p,  
400p, iCIF, iSIF, w288p, w448p, w576p, and w720p.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.4.7  
Default Call Settings  
Call Settings are connected with Call Settings in the call menu. If you leave Call Settings  
unchanged when making a call, the system will use the default Call Settings in the call.  
In addition to the Call Settings Call Type, Net, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k), you also find settings  
for H.320 Auto bandwidth and H.323 Auto bandwidth in Call Settings.  
Call Type  
Call Type can be set to:  
ƒ
ƒ
Video Call  
Telephone Call  
If either the Call Type is set to Telephone Call or the Place Telephone Call  
icon is selected when making a call, the call will be set up as a telephone call.  
In all other cases the call will be set up as a video call.  
Some network configurations may cause the setup of a video call to fail. The  
call will then be set up as a telephone call instead if Fallback to Telephony is  
enabled.  
For MultiSite calls, Call Type enables you to specify both telephone calls and  
video calls in the same conference.  
Network  
The Network alternatives are:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Auto  
ISDN  
H.323  
SIP  
If Auto is selected, the system will select the right network depending on the  
entered number:  
ƒ
ƒ
If an IP-address (e.g. 10.12.34.56 ) is entered, H.323 is selected.  
If the first digits in the number match those set in H.323 Prefix, H.323  
is selected.  
ƒ
In other cases, ISDN (H.320) is selected.  
ISDN indicates:  
ISDN-BRI  
ƒ
If a gatekeeper is present, it is possible to place IP-calls using “telephone-  
style” numbers, e.g. an E.164 alias, according to the numbering plan  
implemented in the gatekeeper. The gatekeeper will translate the dialed  
number into an IP-address, see H.323 Settings for more information about  
gatekeepers.  
Select ISDN to ensure that the call is set up as an ISDN call.  
Select H.323 to ensure that the call is set up as an H.323 call.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Select SIP to ensure that the call is set up as an SIP call.  
Bandwidth decides the quality of the video picture.  
Bandwidth  
When set to Auto the system will establish a connection using a proper  
bandwidth for the call, typically 384kbps for ISDN calls and 768kbps for IP  
calls.  
When set to Max the system will set up the call with maximum bandwidth  
depending on the selected network.  
Overview*  
Auto:  
Max:  
384 kbps on ISDN and 768 kbps on LAN  
512 kbps on ISDN-BRI  
2Mbps (1920 kbps, IP only)  
1472 kbps = 23B, IP only  
1152 kbps = 18B, IP only  
768 kbps = 12B, IP only  
512 kbps = 8B  
384 kbps = 6B  
320 kbps = 5B  
256 kbps = 4B  
192 kbps = 3B  
128 kbps = 2B, Bonding/H.221  
64 kbps = 1B, H.221  
* Note that some software versions and networks do not support all channel selections.  
Restrict  
(56k)  
A restricted call uses 56kbps channels rather then the default unrestricted  
64kbps channels.  
Some older networks (primarily in the USA) do not support 64kbps channels  
and require the use of restricted 56kbps calls. By default the system will dial  
an unrestricted call and downspeed to 56kbps if necessary.  
To force a restricted call, choose Restrict (56k) On.  
H.221 or 2x64 (2x56) Calling  
Some older or low end video systems do not have the ability to make bonded ISDN calls. In these  
cases it is necessary to dial both ISDN numbers separately to call those systems.  
These types of calls are often referred to as  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
H.221 calls  
2x64 calls  
2x56 calls  
- as making 2 x 64 kbps or 2 x 56 kbps calls to the same system.  
Place this type of call by:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Set Network to ISDN  
Set Bandwidth to 128 kbps  
A field for the 2nd number pops up in Call Settings.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
ƒ
Enter the second number in the Call Settings field. For 128 kbps calls that use bonding,  
ignore the second number field and just enter one number to be dialed.  
Using sub-address / extension address / MCU password  
Sub-address is used to address different systems on the same ISDN line and is primarily used in  
European Countries. LAN equivalent extension address or TCS-4 is used to address different  
systems on a LAN, when dialing via a gateway.  
To specify an ISDN sub-address or its LAN equivalent extension address (TCS-4), add a star (*)  
after the number and then enter the sub-address/extension address.  
Example:  
12345678*10 ( <number>*<Sub-address/extension address/MCU password>)  
When dialing IP via a gateway, the number behind the star (*) on IP might be interpreted as an  
extension address.  
When calling to external MCU’s requiring a password (TSC-1), this password can be added after  
the star (*). If no password is specified, the user will be asked to enter the password (after  
connecting to the MCU).  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.5 Audio  
Audio contains the settings:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Inputs  
Outputs  
Echo Control  
Stereo Settings  
Audio Leveling (AGC)  
Alert Tones and Volume  
Graphical View  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.5.1  
Inputs  
Mic 1- 2 and Audio input 3-4  
By default, all inputs are enabled. Just plug in an audio source and it is active. Audio inputs that  
are On will automatically be mixed. Unconnected inputs will automatically be muted. Select Off to  
prevent audio/noise from connected but unused inputs. The activated audio sources are stored  
on camera presets.  
Mic 1 and 2 are intended for electrets type microphones. The microphone inputs are balanced  
with 24V phantom power.  
Audio input 3 (AUX) is intended for connection to external playback devices. As there is no  
acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not be connected to any microphones. The audio  
source connected to this input will be heard from the local speaker as well.  
Audio input 4 (VCR) is intended for connection to a VCR or DVD player. It can also be connected  
to other external playback devices. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should  
not be connected to any microphones. The audio entering this input will be heard from the local  
speaker as well. If Auto is selected, the audio from the VCR will only be heard when VCR is  
selected as video source.  
Mix Mode  
Auto  
The adjustment of each microphone signal is done automatically to obtain the best  
possible audio and minimize the background noise.  
Fixed  
Fixed will maintain a constant weighting of all microphones.  
VCR Ducking  
If VCR Ducking is activated, the VCR audio level will be attenuated if someone talks into the  
microphone or at the far end.  
The VCR ducking is only valid for audio input 4. If input 3 and 4 is configured to one stereo input  
pair, see Stereo Settings, then the VCR ducking will apply to both input 3 and 4.  
Level Settings  
It is possible to adjust the audio input levels according to which external audio equipment is  
connected. The on-screen audio level indicator will make it easier to set the correct input level  
settings. The input level should be adjusted so that the average level reaches the transition  
between the green and the yellow area. The audio inputs are adjustable in steps of 1.5 dB from 0  
dB to 22.5 dB.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
To help adjusting the input levels there is also a Peak Performance meter showing the peak  
audio volume for each of the audio inputs. The level should be adjusted so that the Peak  
Performance meter never reaches the maximum value to avoid the acoustic echo canceller to  
malfunction due to overload of the microphone.  
The default levels for Mic 1 and 2 are set for use with an Audio Technica AT871R or AT841R  
microphone in an average videoconferencing room. The gain can be adjusted correctly for a wide  
range of microphones.  
A few examples of microphone levels are:  
Audio Technica AT871R  
Audio Technica AT841R  
+3dB (default)  
+3dB  
TANDBERG Audio Science:  
Audio Technica AT-861PZ +3dB  
Crown PZM-6D  
+19.5dB  
Audio inputs 3 and 4 are set to a default level which is adhered to by most manufacturers  
of audio-visual equipment and is a level at which most audio-visual equipment (CD-players,  
VCRs or DVDs) will work.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
TANDBERG Audio Science microphone elements: Audio Technica AT-861PZ and Crown PZM-  
6D  
Signal levels -  
microphone  
inputs  
Clipping level  
Vpp  
Nominal level  
dBu  
Input menu  
dBu  
level settings  
0.0 dB  
83.0 mVpp  
69.8 mVpp  
58.8 mVpp  
49.4 mVpp  
41.6 mVpp  
35.0 mVpp  
29.4 mVpp  
24.8 mVpp  
20.8 mVpp  
17.5 mVpp  
14.8 mVpp  
12.4 mVpp  
10.4 mVpp  
8.8 mVpp  
-28.4 dBu  
-29.9 dBu  
-31.4 dBu  
-32.9 dBu  
-34.4 dBu  
-35.9 dBu  
-37.4 dBu  
-38.9 dBu  
-40.4 dBu  
-41.9 dBu  
-43.4 dBu  
-44.9 dBu  
-46.4 dBu  
-47.9 dBu  
-49.4 dBu  
-50.9 dBu  
-46.4 dBu  
-47.9 dBu  
-49.4 dBu  
-50.9 dBu  
-52.4 dBu  
-53.9 dBu  
-55.4 dBu  
-56.9 dBu  
-58.4 dBu  
-59.9 dBu  
-61.4 dBu  
-62.9 dBu  
-64.4 dBu  
-65.9 dBu  
-67.4 dBu  
-68.9 dBu  
1.5 dB  
3.0 dB  
4.5 dB  
6.0 dB  
7.5 dB  
9.0 dB  
10.5 dB  
12.0 dB  
13.5 dB  
15.0 dB  
16.5 dB  
18.0 dB  
19.5 dB  
21.0 dB  
22.5 dB  
7.4 mVpp  
6.2 mVpp  
Table1: Signal Levels - Microphone inputs  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Signal levels -  
line level  
inputs  
Clipping level  
Vpp  
Nominal level  
Input menu  
dBu  
dBu  
level settings  
0.0 dB  
1.5 dB  
15.5 Vpp  
13.0 Vpp  
11.0 Vpp  
9.2 Vpp  
7.8 Vpp  
6.5 Vpp  
5.5 Vpp  
4.6 Vpp  
3.9 Vpp  
3.3 Vpp  
2.8 Vpp  
2.3 Vpp  
2.0 Vpp  
1.6 Vpp  
1.4 Vpp  
1.2 Vpp  
17.0 dBu  
15.5 dBu  
14.0 dBu  
12.5 dBu  
11.0 dBu  
9.5 dBu  
8.0 dBu  
6.5 dBu  
5.0 dBu  
3.5 dBu  
2.0 dBu  
0.5 dBu  
-1.0 dBu  
-2.5 dBu  
-4.0 dBu  
-5.5 dBu  
-1.0 dBu  
-2.5 dBu  
3.0 dB  
-4.0 dBu  
4.5 dB  
-5.5 dBu  
6.0 dB  
-7.0 dBu  
7.5 dB  
-8.5 dBu  
9.0 dB  
-10.0 dBu  
-11.5 dBu  
-13.0 dBu  
-14.5 dBu  
-16.0 dBu  
-17.5 dBu  
-19.0 dBu  
-20.5 dBu  
-22.0 dBu  
-23.5 dBu  
10.5 dB  
12.0 dB  
13.5 dB  
15.0 dB  
16.5 dB  
18.0 dB  
19.5 dB  
21.0 dB  
22.5 dB  
Table2: Signal Levels - Line level inputs  
Note that for the dBu value for input clipping level and absolute max output level, a sine waveform  
is assumed. If numbers in dBV are required, dBV value is 2.2 dB lower than the dBu value, e.q. -  
10 dBu equals -12.2 dBV  
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.5.2  
Outputs  
Audio out 1 - 2  
Audio out 1 is intended for connection to televisions or audio amplifiers.  
Audio out 2 is intended for connection to a VCR or other recording equipment. The signal is a mix  
of audio from far end and local end (except VCR in).  
Note that audio out 2 never should be connected to a loudspeaker placed in the same room as  
the microphones connected to the system. This will cause "howling" and possible damage to the  
speaker system. If an output is Off, no audio will be sent to that output.  
Out 1 Mode  
If Out 1 Mode is set to Auto, the system will select analog or digital (SPDIF) mode dependent on  
the detected Audio Module. If a TANDBERG Digital NAM is detected, SPDIF mode will be  
selected, otherwise analog mode will be selected.  
Setting the Out 1 Mode to either Analog or SPDIF will override the auto-detected mode.  
See Stereo Settings for more information.  
Audio Module  
Select Audio Module according to the type of Audio Module installed if this is not automatically  
detected. The Audio Module setting is only available if the audio module of the system is  
unidentified.  
Level Settings  
Adjust the audio output levels according to the parameters of the external audio equipment  
connected. These levels should only be adjusted when installing new audio equipment. The  
default settings are correct for the TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio module and for most  
consumer electronics devices (televisions, VCRs, etc.). The volume keys on the remote control  
adjust the level of output 1 (the speaker output). The volume control has no effect on other  
outputs.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
Signal levels -  
line level outputs*  
Absolute max. output  
level  
Nominal level  
dBu  
Output menu level  
settings  
Vpp  
dBu  
0.0 dB  
1.2 Vpp  
1.4 Vpp  
1.6 Vpp  
1.9 Vpp  
2.3 Vpp  
2.8 Vpp  
3.3 Vpp  
3.9 Vpp  
4.6 Vpp  
5.5 Vpp  
6.5 Vpp  
7.8 Vpp  
9.2 Vpp  
11.0 Vpp  
13.0 Vpp  
15.5 Vpp  
-5.5 dBu  
-4.0 dBu  
-2.5 dBu  
-1.0 dBu  
0.5 dBu  
2.0 dBu  
3.5 dBu  
5.0 dBu  
6.5 dBu  
8.0 dBu  
9.5 dBu  
11.0 dBu  
12.5 dBu  
14.0 dBu  
15.5 dBu  
17.0 dBu  
-23.5 dBu  
-22.0 dBu  
-20.5 dBu  
-19.0 dBu  
-17.5 dBu  
-16.0 dBu  
-14.5 dBu  
-13.0 dBu  
-11.5 dBu  
-10.0 dBu  
-8.5 dBu  
-7.0 dBu  
-5.5 dBu  
-4.0 dBu  
-2.5 dBu  
-1.0 dBu  
1.5 dB  
3.0 dB  
4.5 dB  
6.0 dB  
7.5 dB  
9.0 dB  
10.5 dB  
12.0 dB  
13.5 dB  
15.0 dB  
16.5 dB  
18.0 dB  
19.5 dB  
21.0 dB  
22.5 dB  
* Applies to Output 1 at volume setting 15.  
Note that for the dBu value for input clipping level and absolute max output level, a sine waveform  
is assumed. If numbers in dBV are required, dBV value is 2.2 dB lower than the dBu value, e.q. -  
10 dBu equals -12.2 dBV  
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.5.3  
Echo Control  
Mic 1-2  
Each of the 2 microphone inputs has a separate acoustic echo canceller. One echo canceller per  
input provides more sophisticated control than having one common canceller for all microphones.  
In addition to echo cancellation, the system has built-in noise reduction (NR). NR reduces  
constant background noise (e.g. noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc.). In  
addition, a high pass filter (Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise.  
On  
Echo control is normally set to On to prevent the far end from hearing their own  
audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times. The echo canceller  
continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room and  
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in  
the audio conditions are very significant the echo canceller may take a second or  
two to re-adjust.  
Off  
You can choose to switch off the echo canceller for the available audio sources.  
Echo Control should be switched Off if external echo cancellation or playback  
equipment is used.  
On+NR  
Activates both Echo Control and Noise Reduction.  
Note that it is your echo canceller that improves the audio quality experienced by the other  
site. When you hear an echo of your own audio it is most likely the far end’s echo canceller  
that is malfunctioning.  
Tips for improving the echo canceller performance:  
ƒ
ƒ
Place all microphones as far as possible from the loudspeakers. Minimum loudspeaker-  
microphone distance should be 2 meters (6.5 ft).  
It is recommended to place the microphones between 1 and 2 meters away from the  
persons speaking. By using several microphones, the ratio distance loudspeaker-to-  
mic/mic-to-speaker can be increased. Increasing this ratio improves the echo canceller  
performance.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Place the microphones as far as possible from noise sources.  
Reduce the volume setting. Ensure that the loudspeakers do not distort the audio.  
The echo canceller tries to estimate the echo path from the speaker system to the  
microphones. Moving objects change this path; therefore try to avoid moving objects. Be  
especially aware of large objects and objects placed close to either the microphone or the  
speaker system as these objects will cause severe changes to the echo path.  
Avoid putting paper sheets etc. on the microphone.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Avoid moving the microphone or loudspeaker.  
In the presence of low frequency noise, enable the noise reduction (NR).  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.5.4  
Stereo Settings  
Settings  
Output response  
Audio out 1 Audio out 2  
Out 1  
Mode*  
Stereo input  
mode  
Stereo  
Speakers  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
SPDIF  
SPDIF  
SPDIF  
SPDIF  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Loudspeaker  
mono  
VCR  
Loudspeaker  
left  
Loudspeaker  
right  
Loudspeaker  
mono  
VCR  
Loudspeaker  
left  
Loudspeaker  
right  
Loudspeaker  
mono  
VCR  
VCR  
VCR  
VCR  
Loudspeaker  
L+R**  
Loudspeaker  
mono  
Loudspeaker  
L+R**  
*Out 1 mode: Auto/Analog/SPDIF is described in Outputs.  
**L+R = Left + Right  
When Stereo Speakers is Off, the output response will be a mono loudspeaker signal on Audio  
out 1 and VCR on Audio out 2 regardless on the Out 1 Mode and Stereo Input mode settings.  
In analog mode the Stereo Speaker On will provide a stereo loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1  
and 2.  
If Stereo input mode is Off, Audio out 2 will be a mix of audio input 3, microphones and the far  
end (the received far end signal is either mono, or stereo that is summed left+right into mono in  
near end codec). (Note that stereo speakers set to on in analog mode will provide a different  
scheme, see table above for details)  
If Stereo input mode is On, Audio out 2 will be a mix of the microphones and the far end. (Note  
that stereo speakers set to on in analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for  
details)  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
If the system is connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeakers shall be  
present if a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and VCR-Right or a stereo  
signal is received from the Far End.  
If the system is not connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeaker outputs  
will be present in the following situations:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
If system is idle and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and  
VCR-Right.  
If system is in a call with mic off and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs  
VCR-Left and VCR-Right, or a stereo signal is received from the Far End.  
Otherwise the Loudspeaker Left signal will be equal to Loudspeaker Right.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.5.5  
Audio Leveling (AGC)  
On  
Select On to allow automatic adjustments (Automatic Gain Control) of audio levels.  
When On, the AGC maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating  
strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will  
not be amplified.  
Off  
Audio leveling is not activated.  
Note that to ensure correct behavior of the AGC, it is crucial that the levels on the input  
connectors are adjusted correctly using the audio input level settings. The AGC will not  
compensate for severe maladjustment of input levels.  
When applying a weak signal in the presence of strong background noise, the AGC might amplify  
the background noise as well as the signal. Therefore, in noisy environments, it is advisable to  
turn the AGC off.  
Example:  
In most conferences, the participants will speak at different levels, and be at different  
distances from the microphones. As a result, some of the participants would be harder to hear  
than others. The AGC corrects this problem by automatically increasing the microphone levels  
when “quiet” or “distant” people speak, and by decreasing the microphone levels when  
“louder” people speak.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.5.6  
Alert Tones and Volume  
Video Call Alert Tone and Telephone Alert Tone  
To help distinguish between incoming video calls and ordinary telephone calls, it is recommended  
to use different ringing tones for video calls and telephone calls.  
Alert Volume  
You may change the volume level for the selected ringing tone.  
Alert Speaker  
The system also has an internal, call-alerting speaker.  
On  
Off  
The internal speaker will warn you of an incoming call even though the monitor may  
not be switched on.  
The internal speaker is switched off.  
Key Tones  
On  
Off  
There will be a sound indicator when pressing keys on the remote control.  
There will be no sound when pressing keys on the remote control.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.5.7  
Graphical View  
Graphical View  
The graphical view is a visual presentation of the audio inputs and audio outputs.  
The Inputs + Far End In are listed on the left, showing the name of the input sources.  
The outputs + Far End Out are listed on the bottom, showing the name of the output  
sources.  
The green dots show the active connections between inputs and outputs.  
Press the buttons for the input sources and the output sources to show the active audio streams.  
Test tone: Select an input/output source and press OK to play a test tone.  
The active audio streams on Far End Out  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.6 Video  
Video contains the settings:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Camera Tracking Mode  
MCU Status Line  
Floor to Full Screen  
Web Snapshots  
MultiSite Picture Mode  
Video Name  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.6.1  
Camera Tracking Mode  
Slow  
The system waits a while before zooming in on a single person speaking.  
Suitable when wide-angle images are preferred over close-up images.  
Normal  
Fast  
Should be used in regular meetings.  
The system quickly zooms in on a single person speaking. Suitable when close-  
ups are preferred over wide-angle images.  
Note that the Camera Tracking Mode entry will not be available if not using the TANDBERG  
Precision HD Camera or the TANDBERG WAVE II Camera.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.6.2  
MCU Status Line  
On  
The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed and provide information  
about the conference.  
Off  
The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will not be displayed.  
Auto  
The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed for a few seconds and  
then timed out. When grabbing the remote control, the indicators will be shown  
again.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.6.3  
Floor to Full Screen  
When "Floor to Full Screen" is enabled, someone who requests floor will be seen by all  
participants as full screen. When "Floor to Full Screen" is "Off", someone who request floor in a  
MultiSite conference using the 5+1 layout will be seen in the large square, rather than full screen.  
On  
Off  
The participant that has the floor is displayed in full screen regardless of what  
MultiSite layout that is used.  
The participant that has the floor is displayed in the MultiSite layout that is used.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.6.4  
Web Snapshots  
The system is able to generate JPEG snapshots and provide them when requested (as ‘http get’  
or via ftp). See Appendix 6 for descriptions of the possible snapshot files.  
On  
Off  
Snapshots generation is enabled.  
Snapshots generation is disabled.  
Note that web snapshots are not generated if the conference is encrypted.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.6.5  
MultiSite Picture Mode  
MultiSite* Picture Mode determines the default layout of a MultiSite call. Available layouts are:  
Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split, and Voice Switched. You can change the layout during a call using  
the layout option in MultiSite Services.  
Auto Split  
Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. A MultiSite  
call with 3 or 4 video participants is displayed with 4 Split. A MultiSite call with  
5 or 6 video participants is displayed with 5+1 Split.  
Voice  
Switched  
Voice Switched mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen.  
4 Split displays the 4 last speaking Participants.  
4 Split  
5+1 Split  
5+1 Split displays the speaking participant in a big picture and the other  
participants in small pictures.  
Continuous Presence layout 4 split  
Advanced Continuous Presence Layout (5+1)  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Voice Switched mode  
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 770 MXP.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.6.6  
Video Name  
As a default, the video inputs are given the names Main Cam, PC, Doc Cam, VCR, AUX or VNC,  
dependent on what video sources are available on your system. The video names cannot exceed  
eight characters. The names correspond to the video names in the Presentation Menu (Choose  
Presentation from the Menu and open the Main Video or Presentation Video pop up menu). If  
video names are changed, you will see the changed name appear in the Main Video and  
Presentation Video menus.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.7 Security  
Security contains the settings:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Encryption  
Encryption Mode  
Passwords  
Camera Standby mode  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.7.1  
Encryption  
(Country specific)  
Auto  
The system will try to set up calls using encryption.  
Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES or DES), the call  
will be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.  
MultiSite calls*: In order to have encrypted MultiSite calls, all sites must support  
encryption. The padlock symbol will indicate encryption mode (AES or DES). If there  
is a mix of AES and DES encryption, only the symbol for DES encryption (single  
padlock) will be displayed. The 'closed padlock' will only be displayed on each site  
when all links in the MultiSite conference are encrypted.  
If the far end supports encryption, the systems will initiate encryption after the call is  
connected (an ‘open padlock’ symbol will be displayed). When encryption has been  
established, a ‘closed padlock’ symbol will be displayed.  
On  
Off  
The system will only send and receive encrypted data. The call will not be  
established if not all participants support encryption.  
The system will not send or receive encrypted data.  
Technical encryption information like encryption algorithm and encryption check code can be  
found in the Call Status menu.  
* Only available on systems with MultiSite option supported and installed.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.7.2  
Encryption Mode  
Auto  
The system will try to use the most secure encryption - AES, dependent on the  
capabilities of the other sites. For sites that do not support AES encryption, DES  
encryption will be tried.  
AES  
DES  
The system will try to use AES with 128 bits encryption when setting up calls. If AES  
is not supported by the other site(s), no other type of encryption will be initiated.  
The system will always try to set up the call using DES with 56 bits encryption on  
ISDN and IP. If all other sites do not support DES, no other type of encryption will be  
initiated.  
Both AES and DES Encryption are supported for mixed ISDN/IP calls. In addition AES -and DES  
Encrypted sites can be connected at the same time.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.7.3  
Passwords  
Administrator Password, IP Access Password, Streaming Password, VNC Password, Access  
Code and Remote Software Upgrade password are duplicated from their respective menus.  
Using the Security menu gives you a quick way to change all passwords of the system.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.7.4  
Camera Standby Mode  
There is a setting to the Security menu called Camera Standby mode On (default)/Off. When  
Camera Standby mode is On, the camera turns away when standby is activated. When the  
system is activated the camera turns back to normal position.  
On  
The camera will turn away when standby mode is activated and turn back to normal  
position when the system is active again.  
This makes it easy to do a visual check to see if the camera is active or not.  
Off  
The camera will always stay in normal position and will not turn away when standby  
mode is active.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.8 Network  
The network menu contain:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ISDN-BRI Settings  
LAN Settings  
Network Profiles  
Data Port  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.1  
ISDN-BRI Settings  
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-BRI, make the following settings:  
1. Set ISDN switch type  
2. Enter ISDN line numbers (and SPIDs, if required)  
3. Disable unused lines  
Some software versions do not support 6 ISDN lines, therefore some of the Line Setup entries  
may be grayed out.  
ISDN switch type  
Select the type of ISDN network connected to your unit. Note that 1TR6 should only be used if  
you are operating the system behind a PABX.  
Line setup  
This menu allows you to program the numbers associated with your ISDN line. If you want to use  
this ISDN line, you need to set Enabled On and enter the numbers of your ISDN line. If some of  
the ISDN lines are not to be used, set Enabled Off. Line 1 should always be enabled. National  
ISDN and AT&T Custom ISDN might require SPID numbers associated with your ISDN numbers.  
If you have received two different SPID (Service Profile IDentifier) numbers for each ISDN line  
from your network provider, you must program both.  
Example*:  
Numbers  
SPIDS  
ISDN BRI 1:  
ISDN BRI 2:  
ISDN BRI 3:  
ISDN BRI 4:  
67838498  
67838498  
016783849800  
016783849810  
23478060  
23478070  
012347806000  
012347807000  
23478420  
23478430  
012347842000  
012347843000  
23478520  
23478530  
012347852000  
012347853000  
* Note that some systems has less than 4 BRIs available.  
Advanced ISDN Settings  
Sub address  
Using a sub address enables you to connect up to eight ISDN terminals to the same ISDN  
telephone number and line. The terminals are addressed by using different sub addresses. To  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
call a terminal with a sub address, separate the ISDN telephone number and the sub address  
with a ‘*’. Note that this service has limited access on some ISDN networks.  
Example: 12345678*2 (up to four digit sub addresses are possible).  
Validate Numbers / MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number)  
The use of MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) enables you to attach different ISDN terminals,  
with different numbers, to the same physical ISDN telephone line. If Validate Numbers is set to  
On only calls to those numbers specified in the Line Setup menus will be answered. This service  
can be ordered from your telephone company.  
Parallel dial  
On  
Off  
Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a BONDING call.  
Channels will be dialed one by one, which may increase the dialing time.  
Send Own Numbers  
On  
Off  
The system will send its own numbers to the far end.  
The system will not send its own numbers to the far end, but please note that the  
network may still send your numbers to the far end.  
Sending Complete  
On  
Off  
The system will send the ISDN message information element Sending Complete.  
The system will not send Sending Complete.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.2  
LAN Settings  
LAN Settings contain:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
IP Settings  
H.323 Settings  
SIP Settings  
Wireless LAN Settings  
SNMP Settings  
IP Services  
Quality of Service  
802.1X Settings  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.8.2.1 IP Settings  
Remember to restart the system after making changes to IP Settings. This can be done by  
selecting the “Save and Restart” at the bottom of the IP setting menu. Changes in IP Settings  
menu will not have any effect until the system is restarted.  
IP Protocol  
IPv4  
IPv6  
Both  
IP version 4 supported.  
IP version 6 supported. IP Address, IP Subnet Mask and Gateway will be disabled.  
Both IP version 4 and IP version 6 supported.  
IP-assignment  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) can be selected when a DHCP server is present.  
Note that for IPv6, DHCP is used for NTP / DNS Server Addresses.  
DHCP IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway are not used because the DHCP server  
assigns these parameters.  
Static  
The system’s IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be specified in the IP-  
address field.  
IP-address  
IP-address defines the network address of the codec. This address is only used in static mode. In  
DHCP-mode, the assigned IP-address can be found on the Welcome Menu.  
IP-subnet mask  
IP-subnet mask defines the type of network. This address is only used in static mode. Your LAN-  
administrator will provide the correct value for this field.  
Gateway  
When using DHCP, the default gateway will be set automatically. If the LAN utilizes static IP  
addresses, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be specified by the LAN  
administrator.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Ethernet Speed  
Auto  
The codec will auto-detect the speed/duplex on the LAN.  
10/Half  
10/Full  
100/Half  
100/Full  
The codec will connect to the LAN using 10Mbps speed/Half Duplex.  
10 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.  
100 Mbps speed/Half Duplex.  
100 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.  
IP Access Password  
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP  
and WEB) requires a password. The default IP Access Password is “TANDBERG”.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
DNS Settings  
DNS Server 1-5  
DNS Server defines the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to 5 addresses may be  
specified. If the network addresses are unknown, please contact your administrator or Internet  
Service Provider.  
DNS Domain Name  
DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.  
Example:  
DNS Domain Name is “example.com”, and the name to lookup is “videosystem” will result in a  
“videosystem.example.com” DNS lookup.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.2.2 H.323 Settings  
E.164 alias  
This is the E.164 address of the system. The E.164 address is equivalent to a telephone number,  
sometimes combined with access codes. Valid characters are 0-9,* and #. When using a  
gatekeeper, the system will send a message to the gatekeeper containing both the E.164 address  
and the H.323 ID of the system.  
H.323 ID  
The H.323 ID of the system may be specified here. The System name is used if no H.323 ID is  
entered.  
H.323 Call Setup  
Direct  
An IP-address must be dialed in order to make a H.323 call. The system will  
not use a gatekeeper or CallManager  
Gatekeeper  
The system will use a gatekeeper to make an H.323 call.  
CallManager The system will use a CallManager to make a H.323 call.  
H.323 Prefix  
When dialing a number prefixed with digits specified by H.323 Prefix, and with Net: Auto, an  
H.323 call will be placed.  
Example:  
H.323 Prefix is "555". Dialing "55582" with "Net:Auto" will select LAN.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Gatekeeper Settings  
Gatekeeper Discovery  
Auto  
The system will automatically try to register to any available gatekeeper. If a  
gatekeeper responds to the request sent from the codec within 30 seconds this  
specific gatekeeper will be used. This requires auto discovery on the gatekeeper  
as well. If no gatekeeper responds, the system will not use a gatekeeper for  
making H.323 calls and hence an IP-address must be specified manually.  
Manual The system will use a specific gatekeeper identified by Gatekeeper IP-address.  
Gatekeeper IP Address  
This is the gatekeeper IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: Gatekeeper and  
Gatekeeper Discovery: Manual.  
Note that if your system is part of a TANDBERG Expressway™ firewall traversal solution and  
is placed outside the firewall, you should register the IP address of your Border Controller as  
the Gatekeeper IP address and set H.323 Call Setup to Gatekeeper.  
Authentication Mode  
Auto  
If Authentication Mode is set to Auto and the gatekeeper indicates that it requires  
authentication, the endpoint will automatically try to authenticate itself to the  
Gatekeeper.  
Off  
If Authentication Mode is set to Off the system will not try to authenticate itself to a  
Gatekeeper, but will still try a normal registration.  
Authentication ID / Authentication Password  
The system sends the Authentication ID and Password to a Gatekeeper for authentication. The  
authentication is a one way authentication from the endpoint system to a Gatekeeper, i.e. the  
endpoint is authenticated to the Gatekeeper. If the Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is  
required, the endpoint will still try to register.  
Multiple H323 Aliases  
On  
If set to On, the system will register multiple H.323-IDs on the Gatekeeper based on  
the values of the parameters: System Name, International Name and H.323 ID.  
Up to 3 aliases are possible.  
Off  
If all fields are empty, the System Name is set to TANDBERG-<serial no> and  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Multiple H.323 Aliases is set to Off.  
If set to Off, the system will register a single H.323-IDs on the Gatekeeper based on  
the following priority:  
H.323 ID  
International Name  
System Name  
The default setting for Multiple H.323 Aliases is Off.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
CallManager Settings  
CallManager IP  
This is the CallManager IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: CallManager.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Advanced H.323 Settings  
The Advanced H.323 Settings only have an effect if they are supported by your IP infrastructure.  
NAT  
NAT, Network Address Translation, is used when a PC and a video communication system are  
connected to a router with NAT support. NAT support in the video communication system enables  
proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video communication  
system (when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). When NAT is On, the NAT Server  
Address will be shown in the startup-menu: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1".  
On  
The system will signal the configured "NAT Address" in place of its own IP-address  
within Q.931 and H.245.  
Auto  
The system will try to determine if the "NAT Address" or the real IP-address should  
be used within signaling. This is done to make it possible to place calls to endpoints  
on the LAN as well as endpoints on the WAN.  
NAT Address  
This must be the external/global IP-address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the  
router will then be routed to the system. In the router, the following ports must be routed to the  
system’s IP-address:  
Port 1720  
Port 5555-5560  
Port 2326-2365  
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.  
RSVP  
Auto  
Resource Reservation Protocol enables the systems to request the optimal amount  
of bandwidth for the duration of an IP videoconference.  
Off  
Resource Reservation Protocol is switched off.  
H.323 Ports  
Static  
When selecting static H.323 ports for TCP connections the ports 5555 to 5574  
will be used for Q.931 and H.245 respectively.  
Dynamic  
The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.  
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls  
as some firewall consider this as a sign of attack.  
When selecting Dynamic, the H.323 ports used are from 11000 to 65535. Once  
65535 is reached they restart again at 11000.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.8.2.3 SIP Settings  
Mode  
On  
Setting the SIP mode to on will enable the system for incoming and outgoing SIP  
calls.  
Off  
Setting the SIP mode to off will disable incoming and outgoing SIP calls from the  
system.  
Display Name  
The Display name part of the SIP Address (URI) is usually a full name or system name.  
Examples:  
“Alice Wonderland”  
“System 01”  
SIP Address  
The SIP Address is the SIP URI used to address the system.  
SIP Address (URI): <text field>  
Examples:  
“1234”  
Server Discovery  
Auto  
When Auto is selected, the SIP Server address is obtained using Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol (DHCP).  
Manual When Manual is selected, the manually configured SIP Server address will be  
used.  
Server Address  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
The Server Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy and registrar. It is  
possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP  
and UDP, but another one can be provided.  
Server Address: <text field>  
Examples:  
“sipserver.example.com”  
“sipserver.example.com:5060”  
“10.0.0.2”  
“10.0.0.2:5061”  
Authentication  
User Name  
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.  
User name: <text field>  
Password  
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.  
Password: <text field>  
Server Type  
Available servers are: Auto, Nortel, Microsoft and Experimental.  
Current RFC’s and Drafts supported:  
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol  
RFC 3581 An Extension to the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for Symmetric Response  
Routing  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 2327 SDP: Session Description Protocol  
RFC 3264 An Offer/Answer Model with the Session Description Protocol (SDP)  
RFC 3263: Session Initiation Protocol (SIP): Locating SIP Servers - No support for  
NAPTR records.  
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3311 The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) UPDATE Method  
RFC 2976 SIP INFO Method  
ƒ
Draft-levin-mmusic-xml-media-control-03.txt - Used for video fast picture update  
requests  
ƒ
RFC 3361 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP-for-IPv4) Option for Session  
Initiation Protocol (SIP) Servers  
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications  
RFC 2032 RTP Payload Format for H.261 Video Streams  
ƒ
Draft-ietf-avt-rfc2032-bis-06.txt - Draft for advanced video signaling including  
resolution and mpi.  
ƒ
RFC 2190 RTP Payload Format for H.263 Video Streams  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
ƒ
RFC 2429 RTP Payload Format for the 1998 Version of ITU-T Rec. H.263 Video  
(H.263+)  
Draft-ietf-avt-rfc2429-bis-05.txt - Draft for advanced video signaling including  
resolution, mpi, annexes and custom formats.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3047 RTP Payload Format for ITU-T Recommendation G.722.1  
RFC3581 An Extension to the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for Symmetric Response  
Routing  
ƒ
ƒ
RFC3984 RTP Payload Format for H.264 Video  
RFC3016 RTP Payload Format for MPEG-4 Audio/Visual Streams  
Media Capabilities supported in SIP:  
Audio:  
PCMU (G.711 u-law)  
PCMA (G.711 a-law)  
G.722 64 kbps  
G722.1 24kbit  
G.722.1 32 kbps  
AAC-LD 64 kbps  
AAC-LD 128 kbps  
Video:  
H.261: QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30  
H.263: SQCIF 1/30, QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30, 4CIF 2/30  
H.263++: XGA 4/30, SVGA 3/30, VGA 2/30, SQCIF 1/30, QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30, 4CIF 2/30  
H.264: QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30, WCIF (w288p) 1/30, W4CIF (w576p) 1/30, 4CIF 1/30, SIF 1/30,  
HD1280x720 (w720p) 1/30  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.2.4 Wireless LAN Settings  
SSID (Service Set Identification)  
Example: “WLANNETWORK”. This defines a local network id for this wireless region. It must be  
the same for all end points and the access point. An endpoint will find the access point if the SSID  
is correct, however if the encryption key is faulty it will not transmit any data.  
Community (optional)  
Community can be used when connecting to an access point where the SSID is the same.  
Example “Unit2”.  
WLAN Mode  
AdHoc  
Used when not communicating with an access point.  
Managed Used when communication is made through an access point.  
Make sure the corresponding settings are programmed into the access point. Press “Restart”  
from Control Panel in order to activate the settings.  
Required cards  
• Compaq WL110 11 Mbps Wireless LAN  
• Lucent Orinoco 11 Mbit/s SILVER  
• Lucent Orinoco 11 Mbit/s GOLD  
• Cisco Aironet 350 series (AIR-PCM 350 series)  
• Enterasys Networks RoamAbout 802.11 DS High Rate  
• Melco Buffalo WLI-PCM-L11G  
Recommended access point  
• Compaq WL410 base station  
Note! The PC card/PCMCIA-card used must comply with the relevant regulations for such  
cards in the country where it is used. The unit must be supplied by power supply (AC-DC  
adapter) powerbox SPN-270-12, which complies with the requirements for limited power  
source according to IEC/EN 60950.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Encryption  
Select Encryption if you want to use WEP encryption on your Wireless LAN connection.  
Increased encryption level will decrease performance.  
Use  
Key  
Select which of the keys shown below you want to use.  
Key 1-  
4
The 64-bit keys can consist of a leading star (*) and 5 characters.  
The 128-bit key can consist of a leading star (*) and 13 characters.  
Start with a * and then the text. Example: 128 bit key: *secretkeyhome.  
Encryption using Hex numbers The 64-bit keys can consist of 10 hexadecimal digits. Example:  
“de01ad4dbe”. The 128-bit key can consist of 26 hex numbers.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.2.5 SNMP Settings  
SNMP Settings  
SNMP Trap Host identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager. SNMP (Simple Network  
Management Protocol, SNMP Ver 1) is used for monitoring and configuring of different entities in  
a network. The system's SNMP Agent responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC  
program etc.). SNMP traps are generated by the agent to inform the manager about important  
events.  
Traps can be sent to multiple SNMP Trap Hosts. Enter the IP address of up to three SNMP  
managers. All traps will then be sent to the hosts listed.  
SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a  
‘password’ in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in the codec. Note that the  
SNMP Community name is case sensitive. The default password is "public".  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.8.2.6 IP Services  
NTP IP  
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.  
This is a requirement for proper operation if H.235  
authentication is implemented.  
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the time of the system to a reference  
time server. The NTP IP setting holds the IP address to a time source where the system can get  
the exact time. The time server will subsequently be queried every 24th hour for time updates.  
The system will use the time to timestamp messages transmitted to Gatekeepers or Border  
Controllers requiring H.235 authentication.  
HTTPS Protocol  
HTTPS can be enabled and disabled from the used interface. From more info no HTTPS, please  
reefer to the IP Protocol sections.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.2.7 Quality of Service  
QoS Type  
Off  
No QoS is used.  
Diffserv  
Diffserv QoS method is used. Please see below for details.  
IP Precedence QoS method is used. Please see below for details.  
IP  
Precedence  
IP Precedence Video  
Used to define which priority audio, video, data and signaling should have in the network. The  
higher the number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of  
packets.  
Auto will provide the following priority:  
Audio  
Video  
Data  
Signaling  
4
4
3
6
IP Type of Service (TOS) helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.  
Delay  
Tells the router to minimize the delay.  
Tells the router to maximize the throughput.  
Tells the router to maximize the reliability.  
Tells the router to minimize the cost.  
Throughput  
Reliability  
Cost  
IP Precedence Telephony  
Used to define which priority audio should have in the network for telephone calls. The higher the  
number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of packets.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
Auto will provide the following priority:  
Audio  
4
Diffserv Video  
Used to define which priority Audio, Video, Data and Signaling packets should have in an IP  
network. The priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.  
Diffserv Telephony  
Used to define which priority Audio packets should have in an IP network for telephone calls. The  
priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.2.8 IEEE 802.1x  
802.1X  
The system may be connected to an IEEE 802.1x LAN network. Supported 802.1x protocols are  
EAP-MD5, EAP-PEAP and EAP-TTLS. The 802.1x authentication are enabled by setting 802.1x  
Mode to On.  
On  
Off  
802.1x authentication enabled  
802.1x authentication disabled  
Anonymous Identity  
The 802.1x Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP types that  
support different tunneled identity, EAP-PEAP and EAP-TTLS. The anonymous ID, if set, will be  
used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity Request.  
Identity  
The 802.1x Username is the username needed for 802.1x authentication.  
Password  
The 802.1x Password is the password needed for 802.1x authentication.  
EAP-MD5  
On  
The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled  
Off  
The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled  
EAP_TTLS  
On  
The EAP_TTLS protocol is enabled  
Off  
The EAP_TTLS protocol is disabled  
EAP-PEAP  
On  
The EAP_PEAP protocol is enabled  
Off  
The EAP_PEAP protocol is disabled  
Note that 802.1x wireless LAN is not supported.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Use  
5.8.3  
Network Profiles  
This menu consists of 7 network profiles; a prefix and a suffix can be added for each profile. If  
you add a prefix/suffix to a profile, this prefix/suffix will automatically be added in front/back of the  
number being dialed.  
Example:  
0 is added as a Call Prefix to the 2nd profile, ISDN. If you enter 12345678 in the dial menu  
and select ISDN, the number dialed will be 012345678.  
0 is added as a Call Suffix to the 2nd profile, ISDN. If you enter 12345678 in the dial menu  
and select ISDN, the number dialed will be 123456780.  
Using the three last profiles you can enter the name of a profile, prefix/suffix and network  
selection. This is useful if you have a fixed prefix/suffix for your service provider.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5.8.4  
Data Port  
The system provides up to two standard RS232 serial ports to allow a computer to be connected  
for data transfer and control purposes. Note that when connecting to a PC the connecting cable  
must be a straight through RS232 cable.  
Baud Rate, Parity, Data bits and Stop bits  
If you wish to connect a PC to Data port 1, you must ensure that the PC and the system are  
identically configured. The available settings are:  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200  
None, Odd, Even  
Data bits  
Stop bits  
7, 8  
1, 2  
The control interface provided by the data port supports a subset of the Hayes command set as  
well as a comprehensive set of system specific commands. It maintains communication with the  
data port’s command interpreter at all times. All features available from the hand-held remote  
control can be accessed through the data port.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Use  
5.8.5  
Restore Default Settings  
Restore Default Settings will restore all system settings. Note that this will not affect your Call  
Directory information, Network Type, Line Setup numbers or your SPID numbers.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6 Peripheral Equipment  
Using the optional peripheral devices outlined in this chapter and the many others available, you  
will be able to build your own applications for use with the system, thereby better integrating the  
system into your business environment. This chapter will explain how to connect peripheral  
equipment to your system. First of all however, we recommend you examine Interfaces, with  
details on the available connectors on the back of the system Codec.  
Peripheral Equipment contains:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Interfaces  
Document Camera  
VCR / DVD  
Additional Cameras  
Additional Microphones  
TANDBERG DNAM and Speakers  
Stereo Speaker Kit  
Telephone Add-On  
Dual Monitor  
XGA Monitors and Projectors  
VESA Display Power Management  
Digital Monitor Power Management  
Extended Display Identification  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
6.1 Interfaces  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.1.1  
Video  
5 Video Inputs  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
1 9 Pin DSUB is used for connecting the TANDBERG Precision HD Camera.  
1 video inputs supporting S-Video through Mini-DIN connectors.  
2 video inputs supporting composite signals through RCA connectors.  
1 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) input, analog  
or digital.  
Levels:  
ƒ
ƒ
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm  
S-Video (Y/C):  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm  
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm  
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm  
The system will automatically adapt to a PAL or NTSC input.  
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I in':  
SVGA (800x600) 60Hz, 72Hz, 75Hz, 85Hz  
XGA (1024x768) 60 Hz, 70Hz, 75Hz  
SXGA (1280x1024) 60Hz  
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz  
4 Video Outputs  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
1 S-Video output, Mini-DIN connector.  
2 composite video outputs, RCA connectors.  
1 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) output, analog  
or digital.  
The first Mini-DIN connector and the first RCA connector provide main video (incoming/outgoing  
video and menus).  
The other connector provides selfview/still image/Duo Video. The outputs are always active.  
The format of the output will be either PAL or NTSC depending on your country’s standard video  
format  
The VGA/DVI output provides either main monitor video or second monitor video depending on  
menu configuration..  
Levels:  
ƒ
ƒ
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm  
S-Video (Y/C):  
ƒ
ƒ
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm  
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
ƒ
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm  
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I out':  
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz  
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz  
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz  
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz  
DVI and specifications:  
DVI stands for Digital Video Interface, and is a form of video interface technology made to  
maximize the quality of flat panel LCD monitors and high-end video graphics cards.  
The TANDBERG codec contains a DVI-I plug that can transmit either digital DVI signals or  
standard analog VGA signals, depending on what type of monitor is connected.  
DVI Specifications  
TANDBERG DVI-I follows the VESA Monitor Timing Standard v1.08, also knows as Display  
Monitor Timing (DMT).  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Supported DVI cables:  
TANDBERG supports DVI-D Single-Link, DVI-A and DVI-I Single-Link format cables.  
DVI-D cables transmit digital T.M.D.S. signals, DVI-A cables transmit analog VGA signals and  
DVI-I cables can transmit either digital or analog signals.  
It is possible to extend existing DVI cables by the use of extension cables. The maximum cable  
length however, is 5 meters. Going beyond that may result in quality loss.  
Pin  
1
Signal Assignment  
T.M.D.S. Data2-  
T.M.D.S. Data2+  
Pin  
9
Signal Assignment  
T.M.D.S. Data1-  
T.M.D.S. Data1+  
Pin  
17  
18  
19  
Signal Assignment  
T.M.D.S. Data0-  
T.M.D.S. Data0+  
2
10  
11  
3
T.M.D.S. Data2/4  
Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data1/3  
Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data0/5  
Shield  
4
5
6
7
T.M.D.S. Data4-  
T.M.D.S. Data4+  
DDC Clock  
12  
13  
14  
15  
T.M.D.S. Data3-  
T.M.D.S. Data3+  
+5V Power  
20  
21  
22  
23  
T.M.D.S. Data5-  
T.M.D.S. Data5+  
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield  
T.M.D.S. Clock+  
DDC Data  
Ground (return for  
+5V, HSync and  
VSync)  
8
Analog Vertical Sync  
Analog Red  
16  
C2  
C5  
Hot Plug Detect  
Analog Green  
24  
T.M.D.S. Clock-  
Analog Blue  
C1  
C4  
C3  
Analog Horizontal Sync  
Analog Ground  
(analog, R, G & B  
return)  
DVI-I - Combined Analog and Digital Connector Pin Assignments.  
The TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP is shipped with a PC cable with integrated audio:  
DVI-A Plug + 2*RCA Plug to VGA Plug + 3.5mm Stereo Plug, length 6m.  
PC cable, VGA - DVI with integrated audio  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Equipment  
Signal name  
CON.  
3 Pin  
CON.  
1 Pin  
CON.  
5 Pin  
CON.  
2 Pin  
CON.  
4 Pin  
Cable color  
DDC Clock  
DDC Data  
6
7
15  
12  
Orange  
White  
Vertical Sync  
DDC Power (+5V)  
Digital return  
RGB Red  
8
14  
Yellow  
14, 16  
15  
9
Red  
5, 10  
1
Black  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
Red Coax  
Green Coax  
Blue Coax  
Brown  
RGB Green  
RGB Blue  
2
3
Horizontal Sync  
RGB Return  
13  
6, 7, 8  
RGB Coax  
Shield  
Outer Shield  
Ground  
Shell  
Shell  
Outer Shield  
Audio Left  
Audio Right  
Audio GND  
Centre  
Gnd  
Tip  
Audio Black  
Audio Red  
Ring  
Centre  
Gnd  
Sleeve  
Audio Shield  
PC cable, VGA - DVI with integrated audio  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
VGA to DVI-A Cable Pinouts  
VGA to DVI-A cable male-male 5m black, maximum length 5m.  
No  
Item  
Description  
1
Cable  
UL20276 3Coax*30#+IP*28#+5C*28#+AEB Black OD:7.0mm L-5000mm  
HDD 15P Male Black  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connector  
Connector  
Tube  
HDD 17P Male Black  
PE Tube Black OD:1.5*10 / 1.0*15 / 1.5*8 / 2.5*10 / 1.5*15 / 5.0*10 mm  
HDD 15P Male OD:8.5mm  
Metal Can  
Metal Can  
Ferrite  
HDD 17P Male OD:8.5mm  
RH 16*28.5*8.0mm  
Screw  
4-40UNC 4*47mm Molded PVC 30P Black  
4-40UNC 4*47mm Molded PVC 30P Black  
PVC Over mold 45P Black [A991826]  
PVC Over mold 45P Black [A2K1188]  
PVC Over mold 45P Black [A2K1017]  
HDD 15P Dust Cover PE Mold [A2T0225]  
DVI Dust Cover PE Mold [A2E1544]  
Screw  
10 Molded  
11 Molded  
12 Molded  
13 Dust Cover  
14 Dust Cover  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Equipment  
6.1.2  
Audio  
4 Audio Inputs  
ƒ
ƒ
2 microphone inputs (balanced, 24V phantom powered) via XLR connectors.  
2 audio inputs (line level) via RCA connectors.  
All audio inputs are active by default. For further information, refer to chapter Audio.  
Audio input connector specification:  
Connector label  
Signal type  
Microphone(s)  
Audio input(s)  
Balanced  
Unbalanced  
Connector (codec)  
XLR-F, pin 1-gnd,  
pin 2 hot, pin 3-  
cold/neutral  
Female RCA/phono,  
sleeve-ground,  
centre-signal  
Input impedance  
2400 ohms (pin 2 -  
3)  
10K ohms  
Max input level when  
set to minimum input  
level  
83 mVpp  
15.5 Vpp  
Max input level when  
set to maximum  
input level  
6.2 mVpp  
1.2 Vpp  
Range, menu  
adjustable input gain  
22.5 dB (16 steps of  
1.5 dB)  
22.5 dB (16 steps of  
1.5 dB)  
Phantom power  
voltage  
24 V +/- 5%  
1200 ohms  
1200 ohms  
12 mA  
-
-
-
-
Phantom power  
resistor, pin 2  
Phantom power  
resistor, pin 3  
Max phantom power  
current pr mic  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
2 Audio Outputs  
ƒ
1 output (line level) via RCA connector providing audio from far end in addition to dial  
tones. This output is used by the monitor. This output also supports S/PDIF.  
1 VCR output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from  
the local side (except from the VCR input) and audio from the far end. This output is  
intended for connection to a VCR.  
ƒ
Audio output connector specification:  
Connector label  
Signal type  
Audio outputs  
Unbalanced  
Connector (codec)  
Female RCA/phono, sleeve-ground,  
centre-signal  
Output impedance  
680 ohms  
15.5 Vpp  
Max output level when set  
to maximum output level  
and volume control set to  
max.  
1.2 Vpp  
Max output level when set  
to minimum output level and  
volume control set to max.  
Range, menu adjustable  
output gain  
22.5 dB (16 steps of 1.5 dB)*  
Volume control attenuation  
(audio out 1)  
0 to 21 dB + mute (steps of 1.5 dB)  
* Additional attenuation is possible on room/loudspeaker audio output using the volume control  
setting  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Equipment  
6.1.3  
Network  
Ethernet:  
Edge 75 MXP: 1 x Ethernet (RJ-45 Jack) LAN interface (10/100 Mb) up to 768kbps  
Edge 85 MXP: 1 x Ethernet (RJ-45 Jack) LAN interface (10/100 Mb) up to 1.1 Mbps  
Edge 95 MXP: 1 x Ethernet (RJ-45 Jack) LAN interface (10/100 Mb) up to 2.3 Mbps depending  
on the software option installed.  
To connect the system to a LAN, use the Ethernet cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard  
Ethernet cable).  
The cable specification is:  
1 ------------ 1  
2 ------------ 2  
3 ------------ 3  
6 ------------ 6  
If no LAN is available and the codec is connected directly to a computer, use a crossover cable.  
The crossover cable specification is:  
If such a connection is needed, the system and the PC must use ‘static’ TCP/IP settings because  
no DHCP server is controlling the small “LAN”, which has been created between the computer  
and the system. When configuring a back-to-back connection between the PC and the system,  
make sure both static IP addresses exist on the same subnet.  
ISDN BRI Interface:  
ISDN I.420 (RJ-45 Jack) Basic Rate Interface S/T (2B+D), 128 kbps per ISDN I/F  
To connect the system to BRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard BRI  
cable).  
The pinout of the S/T interface is:  
BRI  
Pinout  
TX+  
RX+  
RX-  
Pin-3  
Pin-4  
Pin-5  
Pin-6  
TX-  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.1.4  
Data port  
The data port(s) are implemented as Data Communications Equipment (DCE). The connectors  
used are female 9-pin D-subs.  
Signal name  
Direction  
From DCE  
From DCE  
To DCE  
Pin number  
Carrier detect, CD  
Receive data, RXD  
Transmit data, TXD  
Data terminal ready, DTR  
Signal ground, GND  
Data set ready, DSR  
Ready to send, RTS  
Clear to send, CTS  
Ring indicator, RI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
From DCE  
From DCE  
To DCE  
From DCE  
From DCE  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
6.1.5  
Camera Port  
Camera Port  
Pin-outs for the camera port when using the TANDBERG Precision HD Camera:  
PRI  
Pinout  
+12V (presence 2.8mA current source  
when connected in daisy chain)  
Pin-8  
GND  
Pin-7  
Pin-6  
Pin-5  
Pin-4  
Pin-3  
Pin-2  
Pin-1  
TXD (out)  
VIDEO LVDS -  
VIDEO LVDS +  
RXD (in)  
GND  
+ 12V  
Camera Cable  
The TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP system is shipped with a PC cable with integrated audio.  
See chapter: Interfaces – Video for more information about the camera cable.  
NOTE! The enclosed TANDBERG Camera Cables must be used! Do not use other camera  
cables as this might cause problems with the transfer of video signals from the Precision HD  
Camera.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.2 Document Camera  
A document camera can be used for showing text, diagrams and a variety of graphical material  
as well as small three-dimensional objects.  
How to use a document camera with your system:  
1. Connect the document camera to the Doc Cam input, if available, on the system.  
2. Open the Presentation menu from Menu and choose Doc Cam.  
3. You can also program the Presentation key on the remote to activate document camera.  
See chapter Presentation Key for more information.  
If you want to use S-Video from the document camera, you can connect the document camera to  
the AUX input on the system.  
Note that this requires a system with an additional video input.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
6.3 DVD / VCR  
DVD/VCR Playback  
Mono  
For playback, connect a cable between Video Out on the VCR and Video In (VCR) on the  
system. Connect a cable between Audio Out on the VCR and the Audio In (VCR) on the system.  
Choose VCR from the Presentation menu to activate the VCR input.  
Make sure that Audio In (VCR) is On (see chapter Audio). If audio from VCR is too low, this level  
can be adjusted in Audio Settings, Inputs and Level Settings. The audio from the VCR will be  
audible in the local speaker system.  
The audio from the VCR and your microphone(s) will be mixed and sent to the far end. When a  
person talks on either local or far end, the VCR audio level will be reduced to make it easier to  
comment on a video recording when Audio Settings, VCR Ducking: On.  
Stereo  
For stereo playback, connect:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Video cable between Video Out on the VCR and Video In (VCR) on the system  
Audio cable between Audio Out (L) on the VCR/DVD and the VCR L (Audio In 3)  
Audio cable between Audio Out (R) on the VCR/DVD and VCR R (Audio In 4)  
Choose the VCR video source (se chapter Presentation menu) to automatically activate  
the VCR audio and video input.  
Make sure that:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Stereo Input Mode is set to On (see chapter Stereo Settings)  
128 AAC-LD is enabled (see chapter AAC-LD 128 kbps)  
AAC-LD is enabled (see chapter Audio Algorithm)  
Audio In (VCR) is On (see chapter Audio). If audio from VCR is too low, this level can be  
adjusted in Audio Settings, Inputs, Level Settings. The audio from the VCR will be audible  
in the local speaker system.  
ƒ
To enable VCR/DVD ducking (reduce volume when speaking), check that VCR Ducking  
under Audio Settings is set to On.  
Note that the audio from the VCR/DVD and your microphone(s) will be mixed and sent to the far  
end. When a person talks on either local or far end, the VCR/DVD audio level will automatically  
be reduced to make it easier to comment on a video recording when Audio Settings, VCR  
Ducking: On.  
VCR - Recording  
When recording the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main monitor, the local audio  
and the audio from the far end.  
When recording a videoconference, connect a cable between Video Out 2 on the system and  
Video In on the VCR. Connect a cable between Audio Out 2 on the system and Audio In on the  
VCR.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Note that a system with one video output and one mixed (local and far end) audio output is  
required for recording. For playback, a system with one video input and one audio input  
without integrated echo cancellation is required.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Equipment  
6.4 Additional Cameras  
Extra fixed Cameras  
You can connect extra fixed cameras to your system, for example, a whiteboard camera. Connect  
the video output of the additional camera to one of the available Video inputs on the system.  
Note that additional controllable cameras are only available for some roll-about systems. Set-  
tops and personal systems may be able to connect additional cameras.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.5 Additional Microphones  
If your environment is such that you require more than one microphone for your room, e.g. you  
have a whiteboard at a distance from your table microphone, it is possible to connect additional  
microphones to your system. See Appendix 4 for more information.  
Note that this requires a system with more than one XLR input.  
You can connect two microphones to your system. The connectors are marked Mic1, Mic2. The  
connected microphones will by default be mixed.  
When more than one microphone is connected, you have the option to use the Voice Activate  
Camera Tracking feature.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
6.6 Stereo Speaker Kit  
Note that the following applies only for systems with a stereo S/PDIF output.  
The Stereo Speaker Kit provides an pair of floor-standing loudspeakers in addition to the built-in  
DNAM. Using these speakers will enable stereo functionality in your system and thereby enhance  
the sound experience.  
To experience stereo sound, the stereo speakers have to be connected to the Digital Natural  
Audio Module (DNAM) as well as confirming this under Stereo Settings in the main audio menu.  
The stereo sound source may either be located at the far end, or locally as a sound source (CD,  
DVD) connected to the codec audio AUX/VCR inputs. If using a local stereo sound source, you  
also have to enable Stereo I/O mode (On) in the same audio menu, to be able to receive stereo  
sound on your system, and to send stereo signals to the far end. See chapter 4.5.4 for more  
information.  
Check also that the full-range frequency audio coding AAC-LD is enabled (In Call Quality menu,  
AAC-LD is checked, and AAC-LD 128 threshold is the same or lower than the call rate you are  
planning to use). See chapter Audio Algorithm and AAC-LD 128kbps for more information.  
An installation sheet is enclosed in the Stereo Loudspeaker Kit, which also describes  
recommended physical speaker placement. Make sure the complete video system is powered  
down before connecting the Stereo Speaker Kit.  
Note that if stereo speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers  
connected to the Digital NAM, or having other speakers than the TANDBERG stereo  
speakers, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.  
Stereo Speaker Kit specification:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2-way Stereo Speaker system (dual speakers in low- and midrange)  
Passive Crossover Filtering.  
Frequency range 50Hz - 20kHz  
2 x 130mm low- and midrange loudspeakers, 8 ohms nominal, high quality.  
1 x 25mm dome tweeter, 6 ohms nominal, high quality  
Long time max power 90 Watt on all loudspeakers  
Enclosed aluminum speaker cabinet  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Equipment  
6.7 Telephone Add-On  
The system has a built in audio bridge* that can bring in Voice over IP (VoIP) telephony or normal  
telephone sites using ISDN.  
Note that this requires a system with mixed audio output (audio from local and far end) and  
one audio input without integrated echo cancelling.  
In addition to using ISDN and IP for your telephone sites, it is possible to connect a telephone  
using normal POTS line** by  
ƒ
ƒ
Connect the audio out from the conference telephone to the AUX input.  
Connect the audio input from the conference telephone to the AUX output, which  
provides a mixed signal between local and far end.  
*optional MultiSite package available  
** require a conference phone with external audio input and output  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.8 Dual Monitor  
Note that this requires a system with dual monitor video output.  
It is possible to install the system in a Dual Monitor configuration. The Dual Monitor can be used  
to show full screen selfview, still images and Duo Video.  
To use the system in the Dual Monitor configuration:  
1. Connect "Video Out 3" (composite video output) on the system to a video input on the  
dual monitor.  
2. Set "Dual Monitor: On" in General Settings menu.  
Alternatively you can use a PC monitor as your second monitor:  
1. Connect "DVI-I out" on the system to your PC monitor.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
6.9 XGA Monitors and Projectors  
(Optional)  
Some TANDBERG systems can be delivered with optional single or dual TV/XGA monitors. It can  
also be connected to any DVI/VGA/PAL or NTSC display.  
Note that this requires a system with minimum one DVI-I output.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.10 VESA Display Power  
Management  
Because of the tremendous amount of energy consumed by monitors when operating, the system  
will reduce power consumption and extend monitor lifecycle by suspending the (switch off)  
monitors and projectors when the system goes into sleep/standby.  
This applies for all VESA Display Power Management compliant displays that are connected to  
the VGA/DVI output of the system. The display device need to comply with VESA display Power  
Management system (DPMS).  
Note that this requires a system supplied with a VGA/DVI output.  
The VESA DPMS standard consists of four modes, Normal, Standby, Suspend and Off, and  
applies to all Sync formats (e.g. VGA).  
DPMS standard:  
Normal  
Standby  
Suspend  
Off  
H-sync  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
V-sync  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Power savings  
Recovery time  
None  
None  
Minimal  
2-3 seconds  
Substantial  
2-3 seconds  
Maximum  
8-10 seconds  
In Off mode some power may still be drawn in order to power indicator lights etc. EDID contains  
the information on which mode a specific monitor supports.  
TANDBERG supports all four modes. However, in F1 and above, all monitors not listed below are  
automatically set to Off.  
Monitor  
DPMS mode  
Dell  
Off  
T8000 - Pioneer  
T6000 - SAMPO  
Maestro - Projection Design  
T7000 - Sharp  
Suspend  
Suspend  
Off  
Off  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
6.11 Digital Monitor Power  
Management  
DMPM is monitor power management applied over the digital DVI interface. TANDBERG  
supports DMPM in software F2 and above. Six monitor power states are defined.  
Monitor On Power state  
Transmitter (TANDBERG codec) and receiver (Monitor) are powered and active. This power state  
is equivalent with the DPMS normal mode.  
Intermediate Power state  
When the codec goes from active to standby, it turns off the DVI transmitter and the monitor can  
go from Monitor On  
Power state to Intermediate Power state  
Active-off Power state  
The monitor can go from Intermediate Power state to Active-off Power state when the monitor  
timer expires.  
Non-Link Recoverable Off Power State  
The monitor can enter Non-Link Recoverable Off Power State when the codec is switched off or if  
the DVI cable is disconnected. This power state is equivalent to the DPMS “Off (with no DPMS  
recovery)” state.  
Monitor Power Switch Off Power state  
This state can be entered when the power switch on the monitor is toggled to its off position. This  
state has two sub-states dependent on if the codec is switched on or off.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
6.12 Extended Display Identification  
Data (EDID)  
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a VESA standard data format that will allow the  
system to communicate its capabilities, including vendor information like the supported VGA-  
formats and frequency range limits to a PC connected to the XGA/DVI input.  
Note that this requires a system supplied with a XGA/DVI input.  
This means that the PC always* will be able to output a valid VGA/DVI signal to the system with  
no manual reconfiguration of the PC screen settings.  
TANDBERG supports EDID structure v1.3, which adheres to the MS Plug & Play definition.  
This standard contains information on product ID, basic display parameters, timing identifications  
and detailed timing descriptions.  
In F1 and above, TANDBERG will use the EDID information to decide which resolution to use,  
800x600 @ 75Hz or 1024x768 @ 60Hz.  
Example (1024x768@60Hz)  
Detailed timing description:  
PixelClockDiv10000:  
Horizontal Active:  
6500  
1024  
320  
768  
38  
Horizontal Blanking:  
Vertical Active:  
Vertical Blanking:  
Horizontal Sync Offset:  
Horizontal Sync Pulse Width:  
Vertical Sync Offset:  
Vertical Sync Pulse Width:  
Horizontal Image Size:  
24  
136  
3
6
Not  
available  
Vertical Image Size:  
Not  
available  
Horizontal Border:  
Vertical Border:  
0
0
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Peripheral Equipment  
Tested and verified monitors, EDID & Timing  
Listed below are some of the monitors TANDBERG have tested and verified against:  
ADI A715  
Dell W1700  
Dell W1900  
EIZO L367  
EIZO F730  
ErgoScan 400S  
Hitachi CM640ET  
Hitachi CM769ET  
IBM 9494-HBO  
IBM G97  
IBM E74  
IBM 6743-60N  
JVC LT-23X475  
JVC LT-23C50BU  
JVC LT-23X576  
LG L3200A  
LG M3200C  
Löewe TAA112747  
MAG D700  
MAG DJ707  
Panasonic SL75  
Pioneer PDP-50MXE10  
Pioneer PDP-42MXE10-S  
Pioneer PDP-43MXE1-S  
Pioneer PDP-50MXE11  
Samsung 191T  
Samsung 323T  
*Need to comply with the VESA EDID standard.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Appendices  
Appendices:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Appendix 1: Technical Specification  
Appendix 2: Bandwidth Information  
Appendix 3: Environmental considerations  
Appendix 4: Guidelines for setting up rooms for video meetings  
Appendix 5: Security  
Appendix 6: Using the file system  
Appendix 7: Web Interface  
Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1  
Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network  
Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network adapters  
Appendix 11: TANDBERG Cameras  
Appendix 12: Remote control  
Appendix 13: Cisco CallManager registration  
Appendix 14: Diagnostic Tools for IP  
Appendix 15: System Upgrade  
Appendix 16: Declaration of Conformity  
Appendix 17: Dimensions  
Appendix 18: Protocols Supported  
Appendix 19: Cable Specifications  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Appendix 1: Technical Specifications  
Technical Specification  
UNIT DELIVERED COMPLETE WITH:  
Wireless remote control, TANDBERG Precision HD  
Camera, HD Unit with foot stand, microphone, and  
cables  
IP NETWORK FEATURES  
IEEE 802.1x/EAP Network Authentication  
H.235 Gatekeeper Authentication  
DNS lookup for service configuration  
Differentiated Services (DiffServ)  
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)  
IP precedence  
BANDWIDTH  
95 MXP:  
H.320 up to 512 kbps  
H.323 & SIP up to 2 Mbps  
85 MXP:  
IP type of service (ToS)  
IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow  
control)  
H.320 up to 384 kbps  
H.323 & SIP up to 1.1 Mbps  
75 MXP:  
H.320 up to 128 kbps  
H.323 & SIP up to 768 kbps  
Auto gatekeeper discovery  
Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering  
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)  
H.245 DTMF tones in H.323  
Cisco CallManager integration using ECS  
IP Address Conflict Warning  
Date and Time support via NTP  
Call Services  
FIREWALL TRAVERSAL  
TANDBERG ExpresswayTM Technology  
Auto NAT  
H.460.18, H.460.19 Firewall Traversal  
IPv6 NETWORK SUPPORT  
Dual Stack IPv4 and IPv6 simultaneous support  
Net service support on IPv6: Telnet, SSH, HTTP,  
HTTPS, ftp, SNMP, DNS, NTP, DHCP"  
Media support on IPv6: H.323, SIP, Streaming  
VIDEO STANDARDS  
H.261, H.263, H.263+, H.263++ (Natural Video), H.264  
VIDEO FEATURES  
Native 16:9 Widescreen  
Advanced Screen Layouts  
Picture in Picture (PIP)  
Picture outside Picture & Large POP  
Side by Side  
SECURITY FEATURES  
Management via HTTPS and SSH  
IP Administration Password  
Menu Administration Password  
Dialing Access code  
PC Zoom  
Streaming password  
Intelligent Video Management  
Simultaneous videoconference & local PC mode  
Local Auto Layout  
H.243 MCU Password  
VNC password  
SNMP security alerts  
Disable IP services  
VIDEO INPUTS (5 INPUTS)  
MD-5 Challenge  
1 x 9 Pin DSUB: HD Main Camera  
1 x MiniDin, S-video: auxiliary/document camera  
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: document camera/aux  
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: VCR  
Network Settings protection  
SIP Authentication via NTLM  
SIP Authentication via Digest  
1 x DVI-I: PC  
NETWORK INTERFACES  
Input: 800 x 600 (@ 60,72,75,85 Hz), 1024 x 768 (@  
60,70,75 Hz), 1280 x 720 (HD720P) (@ 50, 60 Hz),  
1280 x 1024 @ 60 Hz  
4 x ISDN BRI (RJ-45), S-interface  
1 x LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit (LAN/DSL/cable  
modem)  
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)  
1 x PC card slot (PCMCIA) for wireless LAN  
1 x X.21/V.35/RS-449 with RS-366 dialing, RS-366  
Adtran IMUX, Leased Line, Data Triggered, and  
Manual**  
VIDEO OUTPUTS (4 OUTPUTS)  
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main monitor  
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: main monitor or VCR  
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: dual monitor or VCR  
1xDVI-1/XGA: main or second monitor  
XGA Output  
800 x 600 @ 75 Hz, 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz, 1280 x 768  
(WXGA) @ 60 Hz, 1280 x 720 (HD720p) @ 60 Hz  
VESA Monitor Power Management  
1 x USB for future usage  
WIRELESS LAN SUPPORT  
Compliant with IEEE 802.11b, up to 11 Mbit  
Support for 64/128 bit encryption (WEP)  
Infrastructure or ad-hoc mode  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
ETHERNET/INTERNET/INTRANET CONNECTIVITY  
TCP/IP, DHCP, ARP, FTP, Telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS,  
SOAP and XML, MD-5 Challenge  
SNMP Enterprise Management  
VIDEO FORMAT  
NTSC, PAL, VGA, SVGA, XGA, W-XGA, SXGA and  
HD720p  
Internal web server  
LIVE VIDEO RESOLUTIONS  
NATIVE NTSC:  
Internal streaming server  
400p (528 x 400 pixels)  
OTHER MAJOR STANDARDS SUPPORTED  
H.231, H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3, H.239, H.241,  
H.243, H.281, BONDING (ISO 13871), H.320, H.323,  
H.331  
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity  
Interlaced SIF (iSIF 352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video  
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)  
NATIVE PAL:  
448p (576 x 448 pixels)  
RFC 3261, RFC 2237, RFC 3264, RC 3311, RFC 3550,  
RFC 2032, RFC 2190, RFC 2429, RFC 3407  
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity  
Interlaced CIF (iCIF 352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video  
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)  
PRECISION HD CAMERA  
7 x zoom 1/3" CMOS +10º/-20º tilt +/- 90º pan  
42º vertical field of view  
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)  
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels) decode only  
NATIVE PC RESOLUTIONS:  
XGA (1024 x 768)  
72º total vertical field of view  
70º horizontal field of view  
250º total horizontal field of view  
Focus distance 0.3m - infinity  
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels)  
VGA (640 x 480 pixels)  
WIDE RESOLUTIONS:  
w288p (512 x 288 pixels)  
1280 x 720 pixels progressive @ 30fps  
Automatic or manual focus/brightness/white balance  
Far-end camera control  
w448p (768 x 448 pixels)  
w576p (1024 x 576 pixels)  
w720p (1280 x 720 pixels)  
15 near and far-end camera presets  
Voice-activated camera positioning  
Daisy-chain support (Visca protocol camera)  
STILL IMAGE TRANSFER  
CIF, SIF, 4CIF (H.261 Annex D), 4SIF, VGA, SVGA,  
XGA  
CLOSED CAPTIONING/TEXT CHAT  
T.140 text chat available from Telnet, SSH, Web and  
User Interface  
AUDIO STANDARDS  
G.711, G.722, G.722.1, G.728, 64 bit & 128 bit  
MPEG4AAC-LD  
PRESENTATIONS AND COLLABORATION  
Natural Presenter Package including:  
PC Presenter (DVI-I, SXGA In)  
PC SoftPresenter  
AUDIO FEATURES  
Digital Clarity & Native Formats  
Advanced Video Layouts  
Streaming compatible with Cisco IP/TV, Apple  
QuickTime®, RealPlayer® v8 etc.  
CD-Quality 20KHz Mono and Stereo  
Telephone add-on via MultiSite  
Two separate acoustic echo cancellers  
Audio mixer  
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)  
Automatic Noise Reduction  
Audio level meters  
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT  
Support for the TANDBERG Management Suite  
Total management via embedded web server, SNMP,  
Telnet, SSH, FTP and SOAP  
VCR ducking  
Optional Stereo Package  
Packet loss management  
Active lip synchronization  
GSM/Blackberry interference audio feature  
Remote software upload: via web server, ftp server or  
ISDN  
1 x RS-232 local control and diagnostics  
Remote control and on-screen menu system  
External Services from TMS  
AUDIO INPUTS (4 INPUTS)  
2 x microphone, 24V phantom powered, XLR connector  
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: auxiliary (or VCR Stereo L)  
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: VCR/DVD (Stereo R)  
DIRECTORY SERVICES  
Support for Local directories (My Contacts),  
Corporate Directory and Global Directory  
Unlimited entries using Server directory* supporting  
LDAP and H.350  
AUDIO OUTPUTS (2 OUTPUTS)  
1 x RCA/Phono, S/PDIF (mono/stereo) or Analogue Line  
Level: main audio or Analogue Stereo L  
Unlimited number for Corporate directory (through TMS)  
400 number global directory  
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: VCR or Analogue Stereo R  
200 number local directory  
16 dedicated MultiSite entries  
FRAME RATES  
Received Calls with Date and Time  
Directories in Local Languages  
Placed Calls with Date and Time  
Missed Calls with Date and Time  
30 frames per second @ 168 kbps and above  
60 fields per second @ 336 kbps and above (Point-to-  
point)  
DUAL STREAM  
16 SELECTABLE MENU LANGUAGES  
DuoVideo  
H.239 Dual Stream  
Available on H.323 & H.320  
Arabic, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, English,  
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian,  
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Suomi, Swedish and  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Available in MultiSite from any site (95 & 85 MXP only)  
Dynamic bandwidth adjustment (H.323  
Thai Chinese, Korean and Japanese Input Method  
Editor  
Import Custom Language through TMS  
NETWORK FEATURES  
Auto H.320/H.323 dialing  
SIP  
CUSTOMIZED WELCOME SCREEN AND COMPANY  
LOGO  
Downspeeding  
Picture JPEG (logo.jpg): Recommended maximum size  
is 704x576 for Welcome Screen and 352x288 for  
Encryption Required Screen.  
Programmable network profiles  
Intelligent Call Management  
Maximum call length timer  
Automatic SPID and line number configuration (National  
ISDN, GR-2941-CORE)  
SoftMux  
H.331 Broadcast Mode  
NATO standard KG194/KIV-7 encryptor support**  
URI Dialing  
POWER  
Auto-sensing power supply  
100 – 250 VAC, 50 – 60 Hz  
40 watts max.  
OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY  
0° C to 35° C (32° F to 95° F) ambient temperature  
10% to 90% Relative Humidity (RH)  
MULTISITE FEATURES (95 & 85 MXP ONLY)  
H.323/H.320/SIP/Telephony/VoIP in the same  
conference  
Audio and Video Transcoding  
Video rate matching from 56 kbps - maximum  
conference rate  
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE  
-20° C to 60° C (-4° F to 140° F) at RH 10-90% (non-  
condensing)  
CP4 and Voice Switched  
APPROVALS  
Best Impression (Automatic CP Layouts)  
H.264, Encryption, Digital Clarity  
Dual Stream from any site  
ISDN & IP Downspeeding and IPLR  
MultiSite (H.243) Cascading on H.320 & H.323  
Unicode H.243 Terminal Names  
Dial in/Dial out  
Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)  
- Standard EN 60950  
Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)  
- Standard EN 55022, Class B  
- Standard EN 55024  
- Standard EN 61000-3-2/-3-3  
Directive 1999/5/EEC (R&TTE Directive)  
- Standard TBR3  
Chair control for host system  
Snapshot of ongoing conference (JPEG)  
Snapshot of ongoing DuoVideo/H.239 presentation  
(JPEG)  
Approved according to UL 60950 and CAN/CSA C22.2  
No.60950  
Complies with FCC15B Class B  
Separate welcome page for encrypted conferences  
Conference rates up to 2.3 Mbps with optional  
bandwidth upgrade (1.5 Mbps is standard conference  
rate)  
Up to 4 video and 3 audio sites  
4 sites @ 768 kbps (+telephone calls)  
Mix ISDN-BRI and IP up to maximum conference rate  
UNIT DIMENSIONS  
Height: 16.9"/42.9cm  
Width (including foot stand): 5.7"/14.5cm  
Depth (including foot stand): 9.0"/22.8cm  
Weight: 7.7 lbs/3.5 kg  
PRECISION HD CAMERA DIMENSIONS  
Height: 5.4" / 13.7cm  
EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION  
H.320 and H.323 point-to-point and multipoint calls  
Standards-based: H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3, DES and  
AES  
Width: 8.7" / 22.2cm  
Depth: 5.7" / 14.5cm  
Weight: 2.9lbs / 1.3kg  
NIST-validated AES  
NIST-validated DES  
Automatic key generation and exchange  
Supported in Dual Stream & MultiSite  
PRODUCT RELIABILITY / MTBF  
The predicted reliability is expressed in the expected random Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) for the electronic  
components based on the Power On Hours:  
Power On Hours (POH) > 69 000 hours  
Useful Life Cycle > 6 years  
ISO 9001 certificate is available upon request  
* Requires TANDBERG Management Suite 9.0 or newer  
** Optional equipment, must be specified at the time of order.  
System features vary depending on network selection and software package. All specifications are subject to change  
without notice. TANDBERG is a registered trademark or trademark of TANDBERG in the U.S. and other countries.  
RealPlayer is a trademark or a registered trademark of RealNetworks, Inc. QuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and NetMeeting are either registered trademarks or  
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are property of their  
respective owners. Contains iTypeTM from Agfa Monotype Corporation  
Service availability may vary from region to region. Please contact your TANDBERG reseller for more information.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 2: Bandwidth Information  
for TANDBERG Endpoints  
Bandwidth Information for TANDBERG Endpoints  
Model  
8000MXP, 7000MXP  
6000MXP, Maestro  
Bandwidth  
Point to point  
ISDN / IP  
Standard: 768 / 3072  
Option: 1920 / 4096  
Standard: 768 / 3072  
Option: 1920 / 4096  
MultiSite  
Total: 3072kbps 4x768  
video + 4 audio 3x1536  
video + no audio  
Total: 3072kbps 4x768  
video + 4 audio 3x1536  
video + no audio  
Total: 6144kbps 6x1152  
video + 5 audio 5x1536  
video + no audio 4x1920  
video + 5 audio 3x3072  
video + no audio  
Total: 6144kbps 6x1152  
video + 5 audio 5x1536  
video + no audio 4x1920  
video + 5 audio 3x3072  
video + no audio  
Rate Matching  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /  
H.239)  
Secure Conference  
H.264  
All bandwidths  
Up to 2Mbps  
All bandwidths  
Up to 2Mbps  
Picture Mode MultiSite  
VS, CP4, CP5+1  
VS, CP4, CP5+1  
Model  
3000MXP / 3000NET MXP  
2000MXP, 1500MXP  
Bandwidth  
Point to point  
ISDN / IP  
Standard: 384 / 1536  
Option: 512 / 1920  
3000NET: 384 / 1536  
Standard: 1920 (IP only)  
Options: 512 / 1920  
MultiSite  
Total: 1536kbps  
4x512 video + no audio  
4x384 video + 3 audio  
Total: 2304kbps 4x768  
video + no audio 4x512  
video + 3 audio  
Total: 2304kbps 4x768  
video + no audio 4x512  
video + 3 audio  
Rate Matching  
Yes  
Yes  
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /  
H.239)  
Yes  
Yes  
Secure Conference  
All bandwidths  
All bandwidths  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
H.264  
Up to 2Mbps  
Up to 2Mbps  
Picture Mode MultiSite  
VS, CP4, CP5+1  
VS, CP4, CP5+1  
Model  
990MXP / 990NET MXP  
880MXP / 880NET MXP  
Bandwidth  
Point to point  
ISDN / IP  
Standard: 1920 (IP only)  
Options: 512 / 1920  
990NET: 768 / 1920  
Standard: 1152 (IP only)  
Option: 384 / 1152  
MultiSite  
Total: 2304kbps 4x768  
video + no audio 4x512  
video + 3 audio  
Total: 1152kbps 4x384  
video + no audio 4x320  
video + 3 audio  
Rate Matching  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /  
H.239)  
Secure Conference  
H.264  
All bandwidths  
Up to 2Mbps  
All bandwidths  
Up to 768  
Picture Mode MultiSite  
VS, CP4, CP5+1  
VS, CP4, CP5+1  
Model  
770MXP  
1000MXP  
Bandwidth  
Point to point  
ISDN / IP  
Standard: 768 (IP only)  
Option: 128 / 768  
Standard: 768 (IP only)  
Options: 128 / 768, 384 /  
768  
MultiSite  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Yes  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Yes  
Rate Matching  
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /  
H.239)  
Secure Conference  
All bandwidths  
All bandwidths  
H.264  
Up to 768  
Up to 768  
Picture Mode MultiSite  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Model  
550MXP  
Bandwidth  
Point to point  
ISDN / IP  
Standard: 768 (IP only)  
Options: 128 / 768, 384 /  
768  
MultiSite  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Rate Matching  
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /  
H.239)  
Secure Conference  
H.264  
All bandwidths  
Up to 768  
Picture Mode MultiSite  
Not Available  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 3: Environmental  
Considerations  
Environmental considerations  
This section explains how to carry out basic adjustments and simple tests to ensure that you send  
and receive the best possible image and audio quality when using your system.  
Iris control and lighting  
By default the system camera will use an automatic iris to compensate for changes in lighting. In  
addition to this feature, you may further assist the system to maintain the best possible image  
quality by paying special attention to environmental lighting and background colors as described  
below. Remember the system will send live images of yourself and your immediate surroundings.  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Avoid direct sunlight on the subject matter i.e. yourself, the background or onto the  
camera lens as this will create harsh contrasts.  
If light levels are too low you may need to consider using artificial lighting. As described  
above, direct illumination of the subject matter and camera lens should be avoided.  
When using artificial lighting, daylight type lamps will produce the most effective results.  
Avoid colored lighting.  
Indirect light from shaded sources or reflected light from pale walls often produces  
excellent results.  
Avoid harsh side lighting or strong light from above. Strong sunlight from a window or  
skylight may put part or all of the subject matter in shadow or cause silhouetting.  
If you still have problems with the iris and lighting, manual adjustment of the camera  
parameters might help – see Video Settings menu.  
Dim scenes can also be improved by manually adjusting the camera brightness setting.  
Background  
The appearance of the picture background is very important but easily overlooked. It is important  
to remember that the camera also shows what is behind you when in a videoconference. To  
ensure a suitable background we recommend you consider the following:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Use a neutrally colored background with a medium contrast and a soft texture, e.g. a  
plain curtain with no heavy patterns or strong colors that may adversely tint the whole  
scene.  
Avoid moving backgrounds such as curtains blowing in a draught, moving objects, or  
people walking behind as this may both reduce image quality and distract the attention of  
the calling party.  
Do not place the camera facing a doorway.  
Loudspeaker volume  
The audio system will use the Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) if available and supported by  
the system. The volume of the audio system is controlled by the Volume Control keys on the  
system remote control.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 4: Guidelines for Setting up  
Rooms for Video Meetings  
Guidelines for setting up rooms for video meetings  
The following are a set of guidelines to consider when either building a videoconferencing room,  
or using an existing room for videoconferencing.  
Lighting:  
Audio:  
ƒ
Low Contrast desired for light  
ƒ
Noise Floor preferred less than  
44dBC.  
Reverb Time 0,3 to 0,5 sec.  
intensity. No dark spots.  
Intensity @ table 800 - 1400 Lux as  
measured with an Incident light  
meter.  
ƒ
ƒ
Ventilation:  
ƒ
ƒ
Keep in mind Noise Floor.  
Velocity = Noise. Therefore keep  
velocity of air low.  
ƒ
Block sunlight from entering room.  
Seating Area (Table):  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Should allow all participants to see  
Monitors.  
Should allow camera to “see” all  
participants.  
Non-shiny non-patterned preferably  
light grey surface (if table used).  
Room:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Should be located away from noise.  
Should not have windows.  
Doors should be located off camera.  
Walls:  
ƒ
Color: Generally high contrast color  
desired. Light blue is commonly  
used.  
ƒ
Acoustically reflective surfaces (such  
as glass or concrete) should be  
covered with curtains or sound  
treatment.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
How to prepare a typical room for video meeting:  
The illustration below shows the principles of a typical room designed to obtain the best results  
when using a videoconference system.  
If the system has a separate microphone, it should be placed at the front of the table to ensure  
that all speech will be detected. The best position for the microphone is at least 2 meters (6.5  
feet) in front of the system on a plain, flat table with at least 0.3 meters (12 inches) of table in front  
of the microphone.  
The document camera should be close to the chair person or a designated controller of the  
document camera for ease of use (remember to arrange all the peripherals so that one participant  
can reach each of them to point, change the display, tape, and so forth).  
The camera supports up to 15 pre-stored camera positions.  
The illustration shows three possible camera positions; one for all the participants, one for the  
whiteboard and one for the main speaker. The remaining camera presets are then available for  
other peripheral equipment, for example a VCR.  
Position the system in such a way as to avoid the possibility of somebody inadvertently walking  
into the camera’s field of view when entering the room. Other than the conference participants,  
there should be no moving items in the sent image.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 5: Security  
Security  
The system has several features both to protect from unauthorized use and system access:  
Access Code:  
When Access Code is enabled, the user will be asked to enter an access code before he/she is  
able to make a call. The system will verify if the entered access code is valid by checking the  
code with the allowed codes listed in the access.txt file on the ftp-server in the system. If no  
access.txt file is uploaded to the system, registration of the code will be done without validation.  
E.g. you can enter whatever code you want and have access to the system.  
The access.txt file is a plain text file with one line per access code as shown below:  
1234  
1250  
A1  
B2  
ABC  
To upload this file to the system, follow these steps:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Open a DOS-window and go to the folder where the ‘access.txt’ file is located.  
Type ftp <IP-address of your local system).  
User: press Enter or enter IP-password.  
Type “bin” and press Enter.  
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.  
Upload the ‘access.txt’ file, type ‘put access.txt’.  
Exit from ftp, type "bye".  
Administrator Password  
Access to the administrator menu on the system unit can be controlled using password  
protection. You can set the Administrator Password in Menu Settings, in Security or from the  
dataport:  
menupassword set <pin-code>. The pin-code should be maximum 5 - five digits. To erase the  
password, enter an empty pin-code.  
Streaming password  
By setting a streaming password in the streaming menu on the system, a password has to be  
entered on the streaming client to be able to see the video stream from the system.  
IP Password  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP  
and WEB) requires a password. This password can be enabled from telnet or dataport using the  
command: ippassword <ip-password>. The default IP username and password is "TANDBERG".  
To remove this password, use the command: "ippassword ”. From telnet, this is only possible by  
first entering the correct password.  
IP Services  
The different IP services on the system - FTP, Telnet, Telnet Challenge, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP  
and H.323 can be disabled to prevent access to the system. By using the commands below, the  
services can be independently enabled/disabled:  
xconfiguration Telnet/TelnetChallenge/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS/H323 Mode: <On/Off>  
xconfiguration TelnetChallenge Mode: <On/Off> [port]  
xconfiguration SNMP Mode: <On/Off/ReadOnly/TrapsOnly>  
SNMP Security alert  
This function will notify any Management Application (such as TMS - TANDBERG Management  
Suite) if anyone tries to perform Remote Management on the system using an illegal password.  
The Security alert that is sent to the Management Application will contain information about the IP  
address and the service (WEB, Telnet, FTP) being used for the attempt. If TMS is used, email  
notifications or alarms about the attempt can be sent to specified persons.  
Encryption  
All TANDBERG systems support both AES and DES encryption. By default this feature is  
enabled such that when connecting with any other video system or MCU, a TANDBERG system  
will attempt to establish a secure conference using AES or DES encryption. The TANDBERG  
system will attempt this for both IP and ISDN connections. Where a remote system or MCU  
supports encryption, the highest common encryption algorithm will be selected on a port-by-port  
basis.  
The type and status of the encryption negotiated is indicated by padlock symbols and on-screen  
messages. Encryption on the TANDBERG systems is fully automatic, and provides clear security  
status indicators;  
ƒ
An open padlock indicates that encryption is being initialized, but the conference is not  
yet encrypted.  
ƒ
ƒ
Single padlock indicates DES encryption.  
Double padlock indicates AES encryption.  
In addition to on-screen indicators the Call Status menu provides two information fields regarding  
call encryption. The first field is the Encryption Code, which will identify either AES or DES. The  
second field is the Encryption Check Code and is comprised of an alphanumeric string. This  
string will be the same for systems on either side of an encrypted conference. If the Check Codes  
do not match, this would indicate that the call has been exposed to a Man In The Middle attack.  
When a system with MultiSite functionality hosts a conference, the highest possible encryption  
algorithm will be negotiated on a site-by-site basis. MultiSite conferences can therefore support a  
mix of AES and DES encrypted endpoints in the same conference. A conference will only be as  
secure as its weakest link.  
All systems supporting DES encryption can upgrade to AES encryption. Please contact your  
TANDBERG representative for more information. The standards supporting the encryption  
mechanisms employed by TANDBERG are: AES, DES, H.233, H234 and H.235 (H235v3 & v2 for  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
backwards compatibility) with extended Diffie Hellman key distribution via H.320, H.323 and  
Leased Line connections.  
The TANDBERG AES implementation is validated as conforming to the Advanced Encryption  
Standard (AES) Algorithm, as specified in Federal Information Processing Standard Publication  
197, Advanced Encryption Standard, by The National Institute of Standards and Technology  
(NIST).  
IEEE 802.1x / EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)  
This is a standard for authentication and authorization of units/systems onto the network.  
Static configuration  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System ID and Password  
Anonymous ID for encryption challenge  
Enable methods  
Supported methods  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
MD5 (simple challenge)  
PEAP (encrypted channel)  
TTLS  
Note that 802.1x wireless LAN is not supported.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 6: Using the File System  
Using the file system  
It is possible to access a file system within the TANDBERG system by using ftp:  
DOS-  
window:  
ftp <IP-address of system>, or  
ftp:// <IP-address of system>  
Web-  
browser:  
Description of the different files:  
all.prm  
all settings in the system (including directory)  
dir.prm  
event.log  
sw.pkg  
directory entries (up to 200 entries)  
logs fault situations etc.  
the system software  
globdir.prm file containing up to 400 entries. These entries can not be edited from the  
system, but can be edited as a text-file.  
Files accessible only by ‘ftp get /tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’ or ‘http://<IP-address of  
system>/tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’:  
site0.jpg  
main.jpg  
site1.jpg  
duo.jpg  
Snapshot of current stream if MultiSite.  
Snapshot of selfview.  
Snapshot of decoded stream if point-to-point.  
Snapshot of the encoded stream if transmitting DuoVideo, the decoded stream if  
receiving DuoVideo.  
Custom logos  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Go to the folder where your logo is located.  
Type “ftp <IP-address of your local system>”.  
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.  
Upload the logo, type "put <logo.jpg>".  
The new logo will be displayed the next time you restart your system. Recommended maximum  
size is: 704x576, file-format: jpg. If the file is too large, no logo will be displayed.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 7: Web Interface  
Web Interface  
It is possible to access and maintain the system remotely via a local area network (LAN) using a  
standard Web-browser. Connect your system to a LAN with a Network cable.  
How to configure your system for web interface:  
1. Open Administrator Settings and choose Network\LAN Settings  
2. Specify IP-assignment DHCP or Static. If DHCP is selected, no other settings are  
needed. If Static is selected, IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be  
specified.  
3. Start your Web-browser. In the address field type the IP-address of the system. Enter the  
password and the Web-page of the system will be shown. The default password is  
TANDBERG.  
4. Restart the system. Choose Restart from the Control Panel.  
Example:  
IP-assignment:  
IP-address:  
IP-subnet mask:  
Gateway:  
Static  
196.9.200.129  
255.255.255.0  
196.9.200.21  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Appendix 8: Connecting the System  
to PRI/T1  
(Not available on all TANDBERG systems)  
Connecting the system to PRI/T1  
Using CSU adapter  
Connecting the system to the ISDN network via the E1/T1-interface using an Adtran T1 ESF CSU  
ACE or equivalent CSU, will allow up to 1.54 Mbps connection. The E1/T1-interface must be  
connected to a CSU approved according to IEC 60950, UL 1950 or equivalent standard. The PRI-  
line will run the AT&T 4ESS, 5ESS and National ISDN protocols in addition to Euro ISDN (E1).  
Connecting to Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE  
Connect the PRI cable from the system to the input marked CPE (Customer Provided Equipment)  
on the Adtran CSU (straight through category 5 cable is recommended). Connect to the network  
via the NET connector on the Adtran CSU.  
Configuration of the system  
Open the Settings Menu from the Control Panel and select Network.  
Choose Network Type: PRI and specify your PRI number, max. Channels, cable length (between  
system and CSU) and switch type.  
Configuration of Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE  
ƒ
ƒ
Enter 2)CONFIG menu using SCROLL and ENTER buttons.  
Enter 3)TERMINAL menu. Check 1)FORMAT:ESF, 2)CODE: B8ZS , 3)SET LBO: 0-133  
(corresponding to Cable Length setting on the system).  
ƒ
ƒ
Go to Menu and enter 1)NETWORK menu. 7)SET LBO: 0.0 (according to information  
from Telco).  
Also, other network parameters should be set according to information from your Telco.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 9: Connecting the System  
to the Switched 56 Network  
(Not available on all TANDBERG systems)  
Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network  
Using Telesync TS-256 SW56/ISDN adapter  
Connecting the system to the SW56 network using a Telesync Adapter is described below. There  
are different Telesync Adapters for different configurations of SW56 networks. The network types  
tested with the system are SW56 2Wire and 4Wire.  
Connecting  
Connect the system ISDN1 cable to the BRI S/T interface on the Telesync Adapter. Connect the  
two SW56 cables from the Telesync adapter Line 1 and Line 2 to the SW56 network.  
Configuration of the system  
Select network type to National ISDN.  
LINE 1 SETUP  
NUMBER1:  
NUMBER2:  
SPID1:  
program with number from the first SW56 line  
program with number from the second SW56 line  
program with number from the first SW56 line  
Leave blank  
SPID2:  
How to call  
It is important to use Restrict (56k). Select Restrict (56k) in Call Settings in the Call menu (select  
the field next to the phone book button in the call menu). A second number field will appear when  
ISDN is selected for Net within Call Settings and you choose bandwidth 128 kbps. Enter the  
second number in the call settings menu.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Appendix 10: Connecting the System  
to ISDN Using NT1 Network Adapters  
Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network  
adapters  
Connecting  
Connect the first ISDN cable from ISDN 1 on the system to the S-interface on your first NT1  
network adapter. Connect the other ISDN cables to the appropriate NT1 network adapters.  
Connect the U-interface of your NT1 adapter to the line provided from your network provider.  
For convenience the NT1 adapters could be placed inside the cabinet. If needed, use the shorter  
ISDN cable (RJ45 connectors) delivered with the NT1 between the codec and the NT1 and the  
longer ISDN cable between the NT1 and the connector (RJ45) at the wall socket.  
Configuring  
The configuration of the system is performed in the same manner as described in ISDN BRI  
Settings.  
The NT1 should be powered up and you should check that the network is active. Please check  
your NT1 User Manual.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 11: TANDBERG Cameras  
TANDBERG Precision HD Camera  
(Available to TANDBERG 8000 MXP, 6000 MXP Profile, 3000 MXP Profile*, Maestro MXP and Edge  
75/85/95 MXP)  
Pin-outs and Connectors  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
1. Extra Camera In  
2. 12V DC Power In  
3. HD Video Out, HDMI**  
4. Codec – HD Video Out  
5. Kensington Lock  
NOTE! The enclosed TANDBERG Camera Cables must be used! Do not use other camera  
cables as this might cause problems with the transfer of video signals from the Precision HD  
Camera.  
8-PIN RJ (shielded modular jack):  
This connector is used for the power, video and control signals to the main camera.  
PRI  
Pinout  
+12V (presence 2.8mA current source  
when connected in daisy chain)  
Pin-8  
GND  
Pin-7  
Pin-6  
Pin-5  
Pin-4  
Pin-3  
Pin-2  
Pin-1  
TXD (out)  
VIDEO LVDS -  
VIDEO LVDS +  
RXD (in)  
GND  
+ 12V  
Power:  
2.0 mm DC power jack (+12V, 1A required)  
6-PIN RJ (modular jack):  
This connector is used when cascading cameras: Control (out) signal and external camera  
detection. Note: It does not provide power for cascaded camera.  
PRI  
Pinout  
Pin-6  
Pin-5  
Pin-4  
Pin-3  
Pin-2  
Pin-1  
GND  
GND  
RXD (in)  
TXD (out)  
Presence (+12V in daisy chain)  
GND  
Multiple Camera support:  
For systems that support multiple cameras: The system is able to control a total of 4 cameras.  
Either 1 Precision HD Cameras plus up to 3 WAVE II Cameras, or up to 4 WAVE II -cameras.  
Optional the Precision HD Cameras and the WAVE II cameras are supplied with the necessary  
cabling. In addition, an external power supply for the camera is included.  
You can connect both Precision HD Cameras and WAVE II cameras to the system. Camera  
number one must be connected to video input 1 or to the HD input (data 2). Camera two must be  
connected to video input 2. Camera number three must be connected to video input 3, and so  
forth.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
The maximum length of the camera cable for multiple cameras supported by TANDBERG is 20 m  
(65 ft).  
Dimensions: see Appendix 17: Dimensions  
* Applies to T3000 MXP Profile with new hardware.  
** Disabled when connected to a TANDBERG system using the TANDBERG Camera Cable. This output does not support  
HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection).  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
(Not available with set top systems)  
WAVE II Camera  
Pinouts and Connectors  
8-PIN RJ (shielded modular jack):  
This connector is used for the power and control signals to the main camera.  
Pin-8  
+12V (presence when connected in  
daisy chain)  
Pin-7  
Pin-6  
Pin-5  
Pin-4  
Pin-3  
Pin-2  
Pin-1  
GND  
GND  
RXD (in)  
TXD (out)  
+12V  
GND  
+ 12V  
Standard Phono:  
Used for composite video signal  
Power:  
2.0 mm DC power jack (+12V, 1A required)  
Standard Mini Din:  
Used for S-Video signal  
6-PIN RJ (modular jack):  
This connector is used when cascading cameras: Control (out) signal and external camera  
detection. Note: It does not provide power for cascaded camera.  
PRI  
Pinout  
Pin-6  
GND  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Pin-5  
Pin-4  
Pin-3  
Pin-2  
Pin-1  
GND  
RXD (in)  
TXD (out)  
Presence (+12V in daisy chain)  
GND  
Dimensions  
Front view:  
Side view:  
Rear view:  
Underside view:  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 12: Remote Control (TRC3 /  
TRC4)  
Remote Control (TRC 3 / TRC4)  
The TANDBERG remote control transmits IR-signals using the following parameters:  
Protocol  
Siemens SDA2208  
485kHz  
Reference frequency  
Address  
4 & 7  
IR wavelength  
IR carrier frequency  
940nm  
30kHz  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Remote Control Key Code Map:  
Button  
codes  
Remote Control  
(TRC 3)  
Remote Control  
(TRC 4)  
TANDBERG TRACKER  
Address Button name  
Dec Hex  
Address  
Button name  
Address  
Button name  
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NUMBER 1  
NUMBER 2  
NUMBER 3  
NUMBER 4  
NUMBER 5  
NUMBER 6  
NUMBER 7  
NUMBER 8  
NUMBER 9  
NUMBER 0  
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NUMBER 1  
NUMBER 2  
NUMBER 3  
NUMBER 4  
NUMBER 5  
NUMBER 6  
NUMBER 7  
NUMBER 8  
NUMBER 9  
NUMBER 0  
*
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
#
#
PRESENTER  
PRESENTER  
0
0
0
0
ZOOM OUT  
ZOOM IN  
0
0
ZOOM OUT  
ZOOM IN  
0
VOLUME  
DOWN  
0
VOLUME  
DOWN  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
0
0
VOLUME UP  
MIC OFF  
0
0
VOLUME UP  
MIC OFF  
0
0
0
UP  
0
0
0
UP  
DOWN  
LEFT  
DOWN  
LEFT  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
0
0
0
0
0
RIGHT  
OK  
0
0
0
0
0
RIGHT  
OK  
CALL  
CALL  
END CALL  
END CALL  
PHONE  
BOOK  
PHONE  
BOOK  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
25  
XX  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
19  
0
0
0
0
MENU  
0
0
0
0
MENU  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
LAYOUT  
LAYOUT  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MAIN CAM  
PC  
DOC CAM  
DVD  
AUX  
HELP  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
P0  
P1  
FAR END  
PRESETS  
SERVICES  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P6  
P7  
P8  
P9  
P10  
P11  
P12  
P13  
P14  
0
3
3
WAKE UP  
LOW BATT  
PROG VER  
0
3
3
WAKE UP  
LOW BATT  
PROG VER  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 13: Cisco CallManager  
Cisco CallManager registration  
Configuring an H.323 client on the CallManager 4.0  
The registration of a H.323 client in CallManager is supported on the CallManager (CCM) 4.0  
software and forward.  
1. To configure the CallManager with an H.323 client, log on to the administration web  
interface and go to the phone configuration page.  
2. The Phone configuration page is located on: device (top menu) -> Add a New device ->  
Phone -> H.323 Client.  
3. In the phone configuration page type the IP address of the TANDBERG system in the  
Device name field, select device pool and push the insert button.  
4. A pop-up box will now appear on the screen and ask you if you would like to configure  
the directory number. Push the ok button.  
5. You should now see the Directory Number Configuration WEB page. Enter the  
E.164/phone number of your TANDBERG system in the Directory number field, and in  
the “Forward and Pickup Settings” enter the time of “No Answer Ring Duration”. The time  
selected has to have a value from 1 to 300 seconds.  
6. Push the Add button to update the CallManager with the directory number settings.  
You have now configured the CallManager with a H.323 client and should be able to register the  
TANDBERG system to it. When the TANDBERG system is registered to a CallManager, it will be  
possible to place and receive calls from this system to any other video and voice systems that are  
registered on the same CallManager.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Appendix 14: Diagnostics Tools for  
IP  
Diagnostic Tools for IP  
To use these tools, will require using a PC and setting up a telnet session towards the system.  
Q.931  
To show Q.931 trace during a call you need to issue the command ‘syslog on’. One can get  
traces for RAS, Q.931 and H.245 with this command. It is a complex trace and requires an  
extensive knowledge in H.323 signaling to be understood.  
Ping  
Ping is used to see if the system is able to reach a specific IP-address, using a mechanism in IP  
called ICMP. If the system is unable to register to its gatekeeper, or if it is unable to dial a specific  
endpoint, one can use ping to see if there is at least an IP-route to the gatekeeper or to the  
endpoint. In case you have problems, one would first ping the default gateway, then the  
gatekeeper, and then the other endpoint.  
Traceroute  
Traceroute does exactly that; it traces the route an IP-packet takes to reach its destination and  
displays all router hops. Traceroute is very useful for seeing exactly where there is a routing-  
problem in the IP-network, and for checking where transport-delay is introduced.  
Layer 4 Ports used in H.323 calls  
The layer 4 ports used by the system in a H.323 call can be defined as follows:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Dynamic: The ports are allocated at random from 2048 to 65535.  
Dynamic H323 ports are allocated at random from 11000 to 65535.  
Static: Will use the predefined layer 4 ports listed in the tables below.  
Function  
Port  
1719  
1720  
Type  
UDP  
TCP  
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS)  
Q.931 Call Setup  
H.245  
Range 5555-5574  
Range 2326-2341  
Range 2326-2341  
Range 2326-2341  
TCP  
UDP  
UDP  
UDP  
Video  
Audio  
Data/FECC  
Point-to-point + Duo Video  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Function  
Port  
1719  
1720  
Type  
UDP  
TCP  
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS)  
Q.931 Call Setup  
H.245*  
Range 5555-5574  
Range 2326-2405  
Range 2326-2405  
Range 2326-2405  
TCP  
UDP  
UDP  
UDP  
Video  
Audio  
Data/FECC  
MultiSite + Duo Video  
(*) Note: While using MultiSite, if a site is disconnected and reconnected without terminating the  
entire conference, the next site to be connected will have a H.245 port outside of the specified  
range. If this functionality is required through a firewall, the range of TCP ports can be extended  
past 5564. However, if a site is disconnected and reconnected, without ending the conference  
enough times one can quickly end up outside of this range again.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 15: System Upgrade  
System Upgrade  
Before starting the software upgrade of the TANDBERG MXP system, please make sure to have  
the new software file, (for instance s050000F30.pkg) and the Release Key for this software  
available. Your TANDBERG Partner will provide this for you.  
All options and settings will automatically be stored when upgrading, so no backup is necessary.  
If the system upgrade process is aborted before it's complete, the system will work as normal with  
the original software  
The TANDBERG MXP systems can be upgraded in three different ways;  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Using the web interface  
Using FTP  
Using ISDN  
A) To upgrade using the web interface, please do the following steps:  
1. Type the IP address of the TANDBERG MXP system that shall be upgraded (for instance  
10.0.8.77) in a standard browser, such as Internet Explorer 6.0.  
2. The web interface of the codec will then be displayed. Select the ‘System Configuration’ tab on  
top of the page, and then the sub-tab ‘Upgrade’.  
The following page will now be displayed:  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Figure 1  
3. Enter the Release key in the ‘Release Key’ field and press the ‘Install Software’ button.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
A new page will now be displayed:  
Figure 2  
4. Type in the path to where the new software file is stored, or select the file by using the ‘Browse’  
button.  
5. The progress for the sw upgrade can be tracked by pressing the ‘telnet’ link in the help text box  
BEFORE pressing the install button. Please note that this is not a necessary action for a  
successful software upgrade. An indication of the software upgrade progress will also be shown  
on the display of the system  
6. Press the ‘Install’ button to start the software upgrade.  
When the software upgrade is complete, you need to click on the restart button and press OK to  
restart the system in order to activate the new software. Once verified, the system will reboot  
once more to complete the upload of all systems parameters kept from the old software revision.  
7. To verify that the new sw is installed, refresh the page shown in figure1 after restart. The  
‘Software Version’ should now show the new software version uploaded to the system. The same  
information can also be found in the menu on the system under ‘Control Panel/System  
Information’.  
B) Upgrading using FTP:  
1) Copy the new software file to a folder on your harddisk, for instance c:\software.  
2) Open a DOS window, and go to the folder where the new software is stored.  
3) Type ftp <ip address of the TANDBERG MXP system>.  
4) Type in the supplied ‘Release Key’ as user.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
5) Type in your IP password (default is “TANDBERG”) as password.  
6) Type ‘put <software file name> and press Enter. The new software file will now be  
uploaded to the TANDBERG MXP system.  
7) When the software upload is complete, end the ftp connection to the TANDBERG MXP  
system by typing ‘bye’ in the DOS prompt.  
8) To exit the DOS window completely, type ‘exit’  
9) Restart the system to activate the new software.  
C) ISDN Upgrade  
The TANDBERG MXP systems has the possibility to be upgraded remotely from another  
TANDBERG MXP system using ISDN. Please note that both systems must be on software  
version F3.0 or newer for this functionality.  
Please also note that both systems must be on software version F3.0 or newer for this  
functionality  
1. Connect to the system that shall be upgraded using ISDN  
2. Copy the new software file to a folder on your computer, for instance c:\software.  
3. Type the IP address of the TANDBERG MXP system that the software upgrade is going to be  
done from (for instance 10.0.8.77) in a standard browser, such as Internet Explorer 6.0. The web  
interface of the codec will then be displayed.  
4. Select the ‘System Configuration’ tab on top of the page, and then the sub-tab ‘Far end  
upgrade’.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
The following page will now be displayed:  
Figure 3  
5. Enter the release key for the system to be upgraded in the ‘Release Key’ field. If no release  
key is given, the Far End System will use the previously stored release key if possible. This will  
work when upgrading from a main release to a dot release.  
6 Make sure the setting “Far End System Upgrade” is set to “On” at the remote site. This setting  
can be found in the Settings/General/Permissions menu.  
7. Enter the password set at the far end for remote upgrade (default password is “TANDBERG”)  
8. Press ‘Install Software' .The system will now use about 90% of the call capacity to transfer the  
software file across. During this time, audio and video will be turned off.  
9. Once the software has been transferred and verified at the far end, you will get a new webpage  
with information that the upgrade of the far end was successful. At the same time, a message box  
will appear at the remote system asking if you want to reboot the system to activate the new  
software.  
10. To activate the new software. The ISDN connection needs to be closed, and the TANDBERG  
MXP system must be rebooted.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
In the menu on the system under ‘Control Panel/System Information’, the installed software  
should now be displayed as the ‘Software Version’.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 16: Declaration of  
Conformity  
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
PRODUCT NAME: TANDBERG Edge 75 MXP  
TANDBERG Edge 85 MXP  
TANDBERG Edge 95 MXP  
TYPE NUMBER: TTC7-14  
DESCRIPTION: Video Conferencing Equipment  
This product complies with Commission Directives:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
LVD 73/23/EEC  
EMC 89/336/EEC  
R&TTE 99/5/EEC  
This product complies with harmonised Standards:  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
EN 60950-1 : 2001, A11  
EN 55022 : 1994, A1/A2  
EN 55024 : 1998, A1/A2  
EN 61000-3-2 : 2000  
EN 61000-3-3 : 1995, A1  
TBR 3 Layer 1, 2 and 3  
TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION FILE NO.: X13748  
YEAR WHICH THE CE-MARK WAS AFFIXED: 2006  
For an official, signed version of this document, or details regarding documentation from the technical  
construction file, please contact TANDBERG.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Appendix 17: Dimensions  
Dimensions  
TANDBERG Precision HD Camera Dimensions:  
Back view:  
Side view:  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Top view:  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
TANDBERG HD Unit with Foot Stand Dimensions:  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 18: Protocols Supported  
PROTOCOLS SUPPORTED  
TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol  
A set of networking protocols that provides connectivity over LAN/WAN to any network computer.  
HTTP - Hypertext Transfer Protocol  
A protocol used to transfer information on the internet. A web-browser interface is used to access  
the management computer. (Max number of simultaneous connections is unlimited, although only  
one is processed at a time).  
HTTPS - Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure sockets  
If a Web server supports the SSL protocol (establish a secure communications channel to  
prevent the interception of critical information), the Internet address for the server will begin with  
https:// instead of http://  
FTP - File Transfer Protocol  
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols used to copy files between two computers on the  
Internet. FTP provides standard method for remote software upgrades. (Max. number of  
simultaneous connection = 1).  
TELNET  
Telnet provides access to management functions by using a standard command-line interface.  
(Max. number of simultaneous connection = 8, in addition to the RS232 connection).  
TELNET Challenge  
TMS (Tandberg Management Suite) uses MD5-Challenge Response algorithm (RFC-1321)  
Telnet access for encryption of password over the IP network.  
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol  
A standard network protocol for management and surveillance of TCP/IP networks (RFC 1157  
SNMP v1, RFC 1213 MIB-II).  
DHCP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
DHCP is a TCP/IP protocol that offers dynamic IP addresses and other configuration parameters  
(subnet mask) to network clients. It provides safe reliable and simple network configuration,  
prevents address conflicts, and helps conserve the use of client IP addresses.  
DNS - Domain Name System  
A hierarchical distributed database that contains mappings of DNS domain names to various  
types of data, such as IP addresses. DNS enables the location of computers and services by  
user-friendly names, and it also enables the discovery of other information stored in the database.  
Network Protocol – Is a set of rules and conventions for sending information over a  
communications network. These rules govern the content, format, timing, sequencing, and error  
control of messages exchanged among network devices.  
LAN – Local Area Network  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
A communications network connecting a group of computers, printers, and other devices located  
within a relatively limited area (for example, a building).  
WAN – Wide Area Network  
A communications network connecting geographically separated computers, printers, and other  
devices.  
SSL - Secure Sockets Layer  
SSL is a proposed open standard for establishing a secure communications channel to prevent  
the interception of critical information.  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix 19: Cable Specifications  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
External Network Pinout  
With respect to signals on the NET port:  
For balanced signals a “0”=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to  
terminal B.  
For unbalanced signals a “0”= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to  
GND.  
Pinout on 26-pin HD connector J5  
Call control (menu  
setting)  
Standard  
Mnemonics  
Pin  
Signal  
dir.  
Data  
trig.  
Manual  
numb  
Leased  
line  
V35  
RS449  
RS366  
X21  
RS366  
1
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Frame Ground (connected  
to GND)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DPR  
ACR  
CRQ  
PND  
DLO  
NB1  
NB2  
NB4  
NB8  
Output  
Input  
Output  
Input  
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Digit present  
Abandon Call & Retry  
Call Request  
Present Next Digit  
Data Line Occupied  
Digit bit 1  
Digit bit 2  
Digit bit 3  
Digit bit 4  
Send Data / Transmit  
Send Data / Transmit  
Input  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Output  
10  
11  
12  
SD (A)  
SD (B)  
SD (A)  
SD (B)  
T (A) Output  
T (B) Output  
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
13  
14  
15  
RD (A)  
RD (B)  
RD (A)  
RD (B)  
SCR(A)  
R(A)  
R(B)  
S(A)  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Receive Data  
Receive Data  
x
x
x
x
SCR  
(A)  
SCR  
(B)  
SCT  
(A)  
SCT  
(B)  
Signal Clock Receive /  
Receive Timing  
Signal Clock Receive /  
Receive Timing  
Signal Clock Transmit /  
Send Timing  
Signal Clock Transmit /  
Send Timing  
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
16  
17  
18  
SCR(B)  
SCT(A)  
SCT(B)  
S(B)  
Input  
Input  
Input  
19  
20  
21  
22  
GND  
GND  
TR (A)  
TR (B)  
RR (A)  
GND  
C(A) Output  
C(B) Output  
x
x
x
x
x
x
Terminal Ready / Control  
Terminal Ready / Control  
Received Line Signal  
Detector / Carrier Detect /  
Receiver Ready /  
Indication  
Received Line Signal  
Detector / Carrier Detect /  
Receiver Ready /  
Indication  
RLSD  
(CD)  
I (A)  
Input  
Input  
Input  
23  
GND  
(RLSD)  
RR (B)  
I (B)  
x
x
24  
RI  
IC  
Ring Indicator / Incoming  
Call  
x
25  
26  
LOS  
DTR  
LOS  
Output  
Output  
x
x
x
x
Loss Of Signal  
(Data) Terminal Ready  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Cable Specification  
V.35 Cable  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on cable at Codec end:  
Female 26 pin high-density DSUB with thumbscrews.  
Connectors on cable at V.35-adapter end:  
Male 34 pin Winchester (AMP part number 201357-1 or equivalent).  
Cable length:  
o
o
o
o
Maximum 20 meters (65 feet) for cables using DTR, RI, or RLSD.  
Maximum 50 meters (170 feet) for cables not using DTR, RI or RLSD (data-triggered  
applications).  
Cable type:  
o
Shielded.  
Connector housing:  
o
Metal, with cable shield connected to metal housing at 26 pin connector end.  
Signal Name  
Female  
Male 34pin  
Comments  
26pin DSUB  
Winchester  
Pin number  
Pin number  
Frame ground  
Signal ground  
TX(A), transmit data  
TX(B)  
1
19,23  
11  
A
B
P
Twisted pair  
12  
S
RX(A), receive data  
RX(B)  
RCLK(A), rcv clock  
RCLK(B)  
TCLK(A), xmt clock  
TCLK(B)  
DTR  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
26  
24  
R
T
V
X
Twisted pair  
Twisted pair  
Twisted pair  
Y
AA  
H, C  
L, J  
F
RI  
RLSD  
22  
Note:  
For “Data-Triggered” leased-line applications, signals DTR, RI and RLSD are not used.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Cable Specification  
V.35/RS-366 Cable  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on cable at Codec end:  
Female 26 pin high-density DSUB with thumbscrews.  
Connectors on cable at V.35-adapter end:  
o
o
o
Male 34 pin Winchester (AMP part number 201357-1 or equivalent) and  
Male 25 pin DSUB with thumbscrews.  
Cable length:  
o
Maximum 20 meters (60 feet).  
Cable type:  
o
Shielded.  
Connector housing:  
o
Metal, with cable shield connected to metal housing at 26 pin connector end.  
Signal Name  
Female  
26pin DSUB  
Pin number  
1
Male 34pin  
Winchester  
Pin number  
A
Male  
25pin  
DSUB  
Comments  
Frame ground  
Signal ground  
19,23  
B
TX(A), transmit data  
TX(B)  
RX(A), receive data  
RX(B)  
RCLK(A), rcv clock  
RCLK(B)  
TCLK(A), xmt clock  
TCLK(B)  
DTR  
RI  
RLSD  
RS366 DPR  
RS366 ACR  
RS366 CRQ  
RS366 PND  
RS366 DLO  
RS366 NB1  
RS366 NB2  
RS366 NB4  
RS366 NB8  
RS366 GND  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
26  
24  
22  
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
S
R
T
V
X
Y
AA  
H, C  
L, J  
F
Twisted pair  
Twisted pair  
Twisted pair  
Twisted pair  
2
3
4
5
22  
14  
15  
16  
17  
7
8
9
10  
19  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Cable Specification  
RS-449 Cable  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on Tandberg End:  
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent  
Connector on RS-449:  
o
DSUB 37 pin Male  
Signal Name  
Female  
Male  
Comments  
26pin DSUB  
(Tandberg end)  
37pin DSUB  
(DCE end)  
Pin Number  
Pin Number  
Frame Ground  
Signal Ground  
Send Data (A)  
1
1
19,30  
4
Do not connect shield to FGND  
Twisted Pair  
19,23  
11  
Send Data (B)  
Send Timing (A)  
12  
17  
22  
5
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Send Timing (B)  
Receive Data (A)  
18  
13  
23  
6
Receive Data (B)  
Receive Timing(A)  
14  
15  
24  
8
Receive Timing (B)  
Terminal Ready(A)  
Receiver Ready (A)  
16  
26  
22  
26  
12  
13  
Twisted Pair  
Receiver Ready (B)  
Incoming Call (A)  
LOS KG Resync  
Cable Labels  
23  
24  
31  
15  
25  
36  
NET 1  
RS449  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Cable Specification  
RS-449/RS-366 Cable  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on Tandberg End:  
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent  
Connector on RS-449:  
o
DSUB 37 pin Male  
Connector on RS-366:  
DSUB 25 pin Male  
o
Signal Name  
Female  
26pin DSUB  
(Tandberg  
end)  
Male  
Male  
25pin DSUB  
RS-366  
Comments  
37pin DSUB  
(DCE end)  
Pin Number  
Pin Number  
Pin Number  
Do not connect shield to FGND  
Frame Ground  
Signal Ground  
1
1
19  
19,30  
Send Data (A)  
Send Data (B)  
11  
12  
17  
18  
13  
14  
15  
16  
4
22  
5
23  
6
24  
8
26  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Send Timing (A)  
Send Timing (B)  
Receive Data (A)  
Receive Data (B)  
Receive Timing(A)  
Receive Timing (B)  
Terminal Ready(A)  
26  
12  
Receiver Ready (A)  
Receiver Ready (B)  
22  
23  
13  
31  
Twisted Pair  
Incoming Call (A)  
LOS A  
24  
25  
2
15  
36  
LOS A Unbalanced  
RS366 DPR  
RS366 ACR  
RS366 CRQ  
RS366 PND  
RS366 DLO  
RS366 NB1  
RS366 NB2  
RS366 NB4  
RS366 NB8  
RS366 DSC  
RS366 PWI  
RS366 GND  
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
22  
14  
15  
16  
17  
13  
6
7
8
9
10  
20  
20  
1
7
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Cable Specification  
RS-530 Cable  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on Tandberg End:  
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent  
Connector on RS-530:  
o
DSUB 25 pin Male  
Cable length:  
o
1 meter  
Signal Name  
Female  
Male  
Comments  
26pin DSUB  
25pin DSUB  
(Tandberg end) RS-530 (DCE end)  
Pin Number  
Pin Number  
Do not connect shield to FGND  
Frame Ground  
Signal Ground  
1
1
19  
7
Send Data (A)  
Send Data (B)  
11  
12  
17  
18  
13  
14  
15  
16  
20  
21  
22  
23  
2
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
14  
15  
12  
3
16  
17  
9
20  
23  
8
Send Timing (A)  
Send Timing (B)  
Receive Data (A)  
Receive Data (B)  
Receive Timing(A)  
Receive Timing (B)  
Terminal Ready(A)  
Terminal Ready(B)  
Receiver Ready (A)  
Receiver Ready (B)  
Twisted Pair  
10  
LOS A Unbalanced  
LOS A  
25  
18  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Cable Specification  
RS-530/RS-366  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on Tandberg End:  
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent  
Connector on RS-530:  
o
DSUB 25 pin Male  
Connector on RS-366:  
DSUB 25 pin Male  
Cable length:  
o
o
1 meter  
Signal Name  
Female  
26pin  
DSUB  
(Tandberg  
end)  
Male  
25pin  
DSUB  
Male  
25pin  
DSUB  
RS-366  
Pin  
Comments  
RS-530  
(DCE end)  
Pin  
Pin  
Number  
Number  
Number  
Do not connect shield to FGND  
Frame Ground  
Signal Ground  
1
1
7
19  
Send Data (A)  
Send Data (B)  
11  
12  
17  
18  
13  
14  
15  
16  
20  
21  
2
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
14  
15  
12  
3
16  
17  
9
Send Timing (A)  
Send Timing (B)  
Receive Data (A)  
Receive Data (B)  
Receive Timing(A)  
Receive Timing (B)  
Terminal Ready(A)  
Terminal Ready(B)  
20  
23  
Twisted Pair  
Receiver Ready (A)  
Receiver Ready (B)  
LOS A  
22  
23  
25  
2
8
10  
18  
Twisted Pair  
LOS A Unbalanced  
RS366 DPR  
RS366 ACR  
RS366 CRQ  
RS366 PND  
RS366 DLO  
RS366 NB1  
RS366 NB2  
RS366 NB4  
RS366 NB8  
RS366 GND  
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
22  
14  
15  
16  
17  
7
7
8
9
10  
1
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Cable Specification  
RS-449 Cable to KIV-7  
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External  
Network  
Connector on Tandberg End:  
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent  
Connector on RS-449:  
o
DSUB 37 pin Male  
Signal Name  
Female  
Male  
Comments  
26pin DSUB  
(Tandberg end)  
37pin DSUB  
(DCE end)  
Pin Number  
Pin Number  
Frame Ground  
Send Data (A)  
1
11  
1
4
Do not connect shield to FGND  
Twisted Pair  
Send Data (B)  
Send Timing (A)  
12  
17  
14  
15  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Twisted Pair  
Send Timing (B)  
Receive Data (A)  
18  
13  
12  
3
Receive Data (B)  
Receive Timing(A)  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Receive Timing (B)  
LOS  
16  
25  
19  
9
31  
Signal Ground  
1
4,20,28  
Jumpers  
Jumpers  
19,23,27  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Glossary  
#
199 AV1: External input for the TANDBERG/LOEWE monitor.  
2nd monitor: The second monitor of your video communication system. The second monitor is  
normally placed on the right side of the first monitor.  
4CIF: 4 times CIF, 704x576 pixels  
4SIF: 4 times SIF, 704x480 pixels  
A
AACLD: Advanced Audio Coding Low Delay  
Access code: Use Access code to password protect outgoing calls.  
Accessories box: The cabinet contains the following: W.A.V.E. camera, table microphone,  
remote control and tracker and documentation.  
Accessories drawer: See Accessories box  
AES: Strong encryption. (Advanced Encryption Standard)  
AGC: Automatic Gain Control. Maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating  
strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will not  
be amplified.  
Alert speaker: The internal speaker will warn you of an incoming call even though the monitor  
may not be switched on.  
Audio call: Audio call equals a telephone call. You can make a call with the video system with  
audio only.  
Audio input 4: Intended for connection to an external microphone amplifier or an external fixed  
mixer.  
Audio input 5: Intended for connection to external playback devices (or to telephone add-on  
hybrids).  
Audio input 6: Intended for connection to a VCR or DVD player or other external playback  
devices.  
Audio out 1: Intended for connection to TANDBERG Natural Audio, televisions or audio  
amplifiers.  
Audio out 2: Intended for connection to audio recording equipment (or to a telephone add-on  
hybrid).  
Audio out 3: Intended for connection to a VCR or other recording equipment.  
Auto-display snapshot: Sent and received snapshot will automatically appear on full screen  
display.  
Auto answer: The system will automatically answer all incoming calls.  
Automatic Duo Video: Duo Video Mode is put to Auto. When starting a presentation, Duo Video  
will start automatically (if possible).  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
B
Bandwidth: Decides the quality of the video call. High bandwidth gives high quality.  
C
Call Control Data Triggered: Uses TxData, RxData and clock signals only. Use Data Triggered  
when no handshake signal is available.  
Call control Leased Line: Is a non-dialing protocol and should be used when two systems are  
connected in a point-to-point connection. Use Leased Line when the handshaking signals  
DTR and CD are available.  
Call control Manual: Should be used when no handshake signals are available, and the external  
equipment requires a constantly connected line.  
Call control RS366 Dialing: The only dialing protocol and would normally be used together with  
network clocking RS449/V35 Compatible when the external system uses RS2366 ports.  
Call status: Comprehensive information about the call listing transmitted and received  
audio/video/data information.  
Camera tracking: Voice Activated Camera Positioning - the camera will automatically view the  
current speaker.  
Camera tracking mode: Voice Activated Camera Positioning - the camera will automatically  
view the current speaker.  
Chair control: Enables one participant to control the meeting by selecting which of the  
conference participants that is to be broadcasted to the other participants.  
Channel status: Comprehensive information about the call progress listing the numbers called,  
and if an error occurs a cause code is displayed.  
CIF: Common Intermediate Format, 352x288 pixels  
Closed Captioning: Text chat.  
Codec: The Codec is the heart of the system. The main task for the Codec is the compression of  
outgoing video, audio and data, the transmission of this information to the far end, and  
the decompression of the incoming information.  
Continuous Presence: See Split Screen  
Control Panel: The Control Panel is found in the Menu.  
CSU: Channel Service Unit  
D
Daisy-chaining: Use of several cameras in a video conference.  
Dataport: The system provides two standard RS 232 data ports to allow a computer to be  
connected for data transfer and control purposes.  
Dataport 1: A standard RS 232 data port to allow a computer to be connected for data transfer  
and control purposes.  
Dataport 2: Dedicated to the main camera and will not be available in standard configuration.  
DES: Encryption. (Data Encryption Standard)  
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Diagnostics: Allows testing of individual system components and displays the current system  
settings.  
Digital ClarityTF: Participants enjoy presentations of exceptionally high quality resolution video.  
Disconnect site: As a Chairman, you get the option Disconnect site. Disconnect site allows you  
to disconnect any participant in the conference.  
Do Not Disturb: When Do Not Disturb is active the system will not accept any incoming calls.  
The caller will hear a busy tone when calling the unit.  
Document Camera: A document camera is an additional camera that is used for showing text,  
diagrams as well as physical objects.  
DownspeedingTF: If channels are dropped during a video meeting, the connection is  
automatically maintained without interruption.  
dual monitor: The second monitor  
Dual monitor system: A videoconference system with two monitors.  
Duo VideoTF: Allows participants at the far end to simultaneously watch a presenter on one  
screen and a live presentation on the adjoining screen.  
E
E.164 Alias: The E.164 address of the system. Equivalent to a telephone number, sometimes  
combined with access codes. The system will not register with the gatekeeper if the E164  
alias is not set.  
E1: Network type, 30 channels. Default for PAL versions.  
Echo canceller: Continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room and  
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment.  
Echo control: When set to On the far end is prevented to hear their own audio.  
Encryption: Use encryption to make a secure call. The system will try to make point-to-point  
calls using encryption. If the far end system supports encryption, the call will be  
encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption. (Auto encryption). Set  
encryption to On if you don't want an unencrypted call to be established at all. Set  
encryption to Off if you don't want to use encryption.  
End view: Stop viewing the site previously chosen with View Site, and return the view to the site  
that is currently On Air. Can be used by all conference participants.  
Ethernet Speed: The speed (Mbps) on the connection from the system to the LAN.  
F
Fallback to telephony: Enables fallback from video calls to telephony/speech calls.  
Far End: In a video conference, Far End means the remote side of the conference. Far End  
Camera is your conference partner's camera. Opposite to Near End  
FECC: Far End Camera Control. When activated it is possible to control the far end's camera,  
select video sources, activate presets and request still images.  
Floor: In a multipoint call, use Request Floor to broadcast your picture to all other participants.  
This is handy when you are having presentations, for teachers etc.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
G
G.711: Audio algorithm for normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz) The system will  
always have G.711 enabled.  
G.722: Audio algorithm for high quality audio (7 kHz).  
G.722.1: Audio algorithm for compressed high quality audio (7 kHz)  
G.728: Audio algorithm for compressed normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz)  
Gateway: The gateway enables sites on IP and sites on ISDN to participate in meetings with  
each other.  
Global Phone Book: A phone book provided by TMS.  
H
H.261: Video algorithm for legacy video compression and decompression. The system will always  
transmit H.261  
H.263: Video algorithm for normal video compression and decompression  
H.264: Video algorithm for bandwidth-efficient video compression and decompression  
Hardware serial number: A unique number (listed in the System Information menu) to identify  
your system towards your TANDBERG representatives.  
Humfilter: A highpass filter which reduces very low frequency noise.  
I
iCIF: Interlaced CIF, 352x288 pixels, 50 fields per second  
Incoming call: Someone calls in to your system  
Incoming MCU Calls: If occupied in a call, the system will provide a visual/audio indication of an  
incoming call and ask to accept or reject the call.  
IP address: Defines the network address of the system. This address is only used in static mode.  
IP assignment: IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway are assigned by the DHCP server.  
IP assignment Static: The system's IP-address and IP-subnet mask must be specified in the IP-  
address field.  
IP Precedence: Used to define which priority the system should have in the network. Higher  
numbers indicate higher priority.  
IP subnet mask: Defines the type of network. This address is only used in static mode.  
IP TOS: IP Type Of Service. Helps a router select a router path when multiple paths are  
available.  
iSIF: Interlaced SIF, 352x240 pixels, 60 fields per second  
L
Layout: Use the Layout key to change picture layout on the screen.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
M
Main Camera: Your camera. Video input 1  
Max call length: This feature will automatically end both incoming and outgoing calls when the  
call time exceeds the length specified.  
Max channels: Indicates the maximum number of channels the system is allowed to use on the  
E1/T1 interface.  
MCU: Multipoint Conference Unit.  
MCU status line: Shows indicators for MultiSite, MCU and DuoVideo  
MicOff: Microphone is switched off.  
Mix mode: How to adjust the weighting of each microphone to obtain the best possible audio and  
minimize the background noise.  
Modem mode: (Dataport) Supports external control of the system via a PC as in Control Mode.  
Once a call is established, Dataport 1 will automatically switch to Data mode. When the  
call disconnects, Dataport 1 switches back to Control Mode.  
MSN: Multiple Subscriber Number. Possible to attach different ISDN terminals, with different  
numbers, to the same physical ISDN telephone line. The service can be ordered from the  
telephone company.  
multipoint call: A call with more than two participants including yourself  
MultiSite: The TANDBERG systems internal MCU. Built-in system which makes it possible to  
establish meetings with up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls. The MultiSite option is  
not available on all systems.  
MultiSite cascading: By connecting up to 4 or 6 (depending on the system capacity) MultiSite  
systems together to achieve a higher number of participants in a multipoint call.  
N
NAT: Network Address Translation. NAT support in the video communcation system enables  
proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video system when  
the IP traffic goes through a NAT router. Used in small LANs, often home offices, when a  
PC and a video communication system is connected to a router with NAT support.  
NAT Address: The external/global IP-address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to  
the router will then be routed to the system's IP address.  
Natural Audio ModuleTM: Designed to improve audio quality during a videoconference. It is  
mounted in the cabinet above the Codec and consists of an audio system optimized for  
speech.  
Natural Presenter Package: Consists of Duo Video, Digital Clarity and PC Presenter.  
Natural VideoTF: 60 fields per second true interlaced picture.  
Near End: In a video conference, Near End means your own side of the conference. Near  
Camera is your own camera. Opposite to Far End  
Network clocking: Specifies the number of physical external clock signals.  
Network Interface: Indicates if the network is of type E1 or T1.  
Network profiles: It is possible to define up to 6 network profiles, each consisting of name and  
call prefix, and 3 of them also include network selection.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Non Standard Facility: The network provider may require service selection in your ISDN  
configuration. Valid NSF codes are from 1 to 31. 0 will disable NSF service codes.  
NR: Noise Reduction. Reduces constant background noise (e.g. noise from air-conditioning  
systems, cooling fans, etc.).  
NSF: Non Standard Facility.  
NTSC: National Television System Committee. Video standard corresponding to 4SIF. Primary  
used in USA, Japan and other countries.  
O
Option Key: Required by the system to activate optional features such as MultiSite and  
Presenter.  
P
PAL: Phase Alternation by Line. Video standard corresponding to 4CIF. Primary used in Europe,  
Middle East and Asia  
Parallel dial: Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a bonding call.  
PC PresenterTF: An easily accessible PC connection plug. When connected the PC image is  
displayed on the monitor.  
PC SoftPresenterTF: Shows PC images via the LAN connection.  
PIP: Picture-In-Picture  
point-to-point call: A call with two participants including your self  
POP: Picture Outside Picture. POP is a picture layout mode that is optimized for wide screens:  
Full screen, 1+3 layout and emulated dual monitor layout.  
Precision HD Camera: High Definition camera – delivers high resolution quality video  
Presentation: Presentation means to show another video source. Use the Presentation Key for a  
predefined presentation source. Use the presentation menu to choose among all  
available video sources.  
Presentation source: The video source that is on display when you press the Presentation Key  
on the remote control  
Presets: Predefined camera positions (and video sources)  
Q
QCIF: Quarter CIF, 176x144 pixels  
QSIF: Quarter SIF, 176x120 pixels  
R
Release Floor: To end the request floor function.  
release floor to site: Allows the chairman to release the floor.  
Remote: Short for Remote Control  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Request Floor: The MCU will broadcast the video in full screen to all other participants in the  
conference. If the MCU conference has a chairman, a request will be sent to the the  
chairman.  
Restart: Restarts the system.  
Restore defaults: Restores system settings to the factory defaults.  
Restricted call: A call to a 56 kbps network. By default the system will dial an unrestricted call (a  
call to a 64 kbps network) and downspeed to 56 kbps if necessary.  
S
S-VHS: S-video  
S-video: The standard camera uses one of the S-video inputs in the codec.  
Selfview: Outgoing video. In most cases, the image of your self.  
Serial number: A unique number (the hardware serial number, listed in the System Information  
menu) to identify your system towards your TANDBERG representatives.  
Side-by-Side: Side-by-side view means that two pictures are displayed side by side each other  
on the screen. You will se two equally sized pictures.  
SIF: Standard Input Format, 352x240 pixels  
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.  
SNMP Community: SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP  
requests must have a password in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in  
the system. The SNMP Community name is case sensitive.  
SNMP Trap Host: Identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager.  
SNMP traps: Generated by the agent to inform the manager about important events.  
SoftMux: Ensures high reliability and includes the unique Downspeeding feature. It also makes it  
possible to dial to another video communication equipment, phones and mobile phones  
in a uniform way, and provides an on-screen, real-time feedback on the progress of a  
call.  
Split Screen: All the participants in a MultiSite conference are displayed on the screen. (Former  
Continuous Presence)  
Start Channel: Indicates the firstE1/T1 channel the system is allowed to use. The setting might  
be used when if the E1/T1 line is shared with other equipment.  
Start up video source: The video source that is on display when the system wakes up from  
standby mode.  
Status Format: Provides call quality feedback on the status line.  
Streaming: Allows broadcasting of audio/video via an IP network.  
Streaming Address: Defined as the IP-address of a streaming client, streaming server or a  
multicast address.  
Streaming Address Port: If several codecs are streaming to the same IP-address, different  
ports have to be used in order for the client to know which stream to receive.  
Streaming Allow remote Start: Streaming can be started from the Video communication system  
using the remote control, by using the Data port, or from external user interfaces like the  
Web-browser or Telnet session.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
Streaming Announcements: The system will announce to the network that it is streaming. This  
enables a streaming client (e.g. a PC) to connect to the system's streaming session.  
Used by Cisco IP/TV.  
Streaming Password: Prevents unauthorized access to the streaming functionality.  
Streaming Source: Select between local video and/or far end video to be streamed. Local and  
far end audio is always streamed.  
Streaming TTL/Router Hops: Used for streaming data to limit how many routers the data should  
pass before it is rejected.  
Streaming Video Rate: Defines the Video streaming rate from the system.  
SVGA: Super VGA. (800x600)  
SXGA: Super extended Graphics Array (1280x1024)  
System information: Lists system numbers, line status, software version and other useful  
information.  
System name: Identifies a video communication system  
T
T1: Network type, 24 channels. Default for NTSC versions.  
T1 Line Coding: Indicates how the signals on the line should be coded. If parts of the systems  
use restricted coding, this should be selected.  
Take chair: Request chairmanship of the conference. If no one else is chairman, the request is  
granted.  
TCS-4: Used to address different systems on a LAN when dialing in via a gateway.  
Terminal Names: Lists the site numbers or name (if supported) of other sites connected in the  
conference.  
Terminate meeting: The chairman can terminate the conference, i.e. all participants are  
disconnected.  
TMS: TANDBERG Management Suite  
Touch Tones: To dial extension numbers etc. during a call, use touch tones in order to get tones  
instead of preset on the number keys.  
Tracker: The tracker is a small infrared remote control device made to steer the camera to any  
desired location within the room.  
TSC-1: TCS-1 is used for H243 password on H320 MCU's  
V
VCR: Video Cassette Recorder  
VGA: Video Graphics Array. (640 x 480)  
VGA Out Quality: Changes the resolution of the VGA signal available in the VGA Out connector  
at the rear of the codec.  
View Settings: Displays all the system settings in a read only format.  
View site: View any participant in the conference other than the participant currently On Air. Can  
be used by all conference participants.  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
VNC: Virtual Network Computing.  
Voice Switched: The active site will be displayed in full screen during a MultiSite conference.  
W
WAVE II Camera: Wide Angle View Camera - delivers the widest angle of view in the industry.  
Welcome menu: The welcome menu displays the Menu when you are outside a call.  
X
XGA: extended Graphics Array (1024 x 768)  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TANDBERG Edge 75/85/95 MXP  
9 Index  
A
G
Access Code......................................96, 118  
Add Another Call........................................37  
Additional microphone.............................232  
Administrator Password...........................136  
Alert Speaker...........................................176  
Alert Tones and Volume..........................176  
Allowance ................................................118  
Answer an incoming Call...........................44  
Assign Floor to Participant.........................87  
Audio  
Inputs ...................................................166  
Outputs.................................................170  
Audio Algorithm .......................................155  
Audio Demo.............................................108  
Audio Leveling (AGC)..............................175  
AudioScience microphone.......................232  
Auto answer.............................................115  
Auto-Display Snapshot............................149  
Automatic Camera Tracking......................71  
B
Gatekeeper ............................................. 199  
Group Layout ............................................ 84  
H
H.239 ................................ 77, 144, 145, 147  
Hardware serial number ........................... 96  
I
Indicators .................................................. 31  
Interfaces ................................................ 217  
IP Address Conflict Check...................... 105  
IP Settings............................................... 197  
L
Language................................................ 112  
Layout ....................................................... 25  
Letter keys ................................................ 28  
M
MCU.......................................................... 91  
MCU Status Line..................................... 180  
Menu timeout in call................................ 129  
Mic off ....................................................... 26  
Microphone ......................................... 5, 232  
MultiSite .................................................... 91  
MultiSite (Built-in)...................................... 91  
N
Natural Video .......................................... 157  
Navigation................................................. 22  
Network Profiles...................................... 213  
Number keys............................................. 28  
P
PC Presenter ............................................ 75  
PC Soft Presenter..................................... 76  
PC SoftPresenter...................................... 76  
Permissions ............................................ 118  
Phone Book  
Delete.................................................... 59  
Edit ........................................................ 58  
MultiSite................................................. 56  
New ....................................................... 55  
Picture Control .......................................... 69  
PIP Appearance...................................... 150  
PIP Placing ............................................. 150  
Postpone 1 hour........................................ 47  
Postpone 3 hours...................................... 48  
Precision HD Camera......................... 1, 260  
Presentation  
Battery handling...........................................v  
C
Call Status .................................................98  
Camera Presets.........................................67  
Camera Tracking Mode...........................179  
Codec ..........................................................5  
Connecting cables.....................................11  
Contact us................................................... ix  
D
Default Call Settings................................162  
Digital Clarity............................................159  
Disconnect Participant...............................89  
Display snapshot .................................78, 79  
Do Not Disturb ...........................................49  
Document camera ...................................228  
Dual Monitor ............................................236  
Dual Stream...................... 77, 144, 145, 147  
Dual Video Stream ........... 77, 144, 145, 147  
Duo Video......................... 77, 144, 145, 147  
Duo Video Quality....................................159  
E
Echo Control............................................172  
EDID ........................................................240  
Encryption................................................187  
End Call .....................................................45  
Extra cameras..........................................231  
F
Presentation Key........................... 73, 147  
Presentation Menu................................ 74  
Presentation Source ............................... 147  
Presets...................................................... 67  
Production of products.................................v  
Far End Camera Control ...........................65  
Far End Control .........................................66  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
R
Terminate Meeting.................................... 90  
Test Subsystem ........................................ 99  
Text Chat ................................................ 107  
Timeout................................................... 129  
To connect a PC to Dataport 1 ............... 214  
Touch Tones............................................. 29  
V
Video Algorithm....................................... 154  
Video Call.................................................. 36  
Video cassette recorder (VCR)............... 229  
Video Name ............................................ 185  
Video Quality........................................... 159  
View Administrator Settings.................... 100  
View Site................................................... 88  
VNC Settings .......................................... 151  
Volume + and - ......................................... 27  
W
Warnings................................................. 106  
Waste handling ............................................v  
WAVE II camera ................................. 5, 260  
Web Snapshots....................................... 182  
Welcome menu....................................... 140  
Welcome Screen....................................... 17  
X
Release Chair............................................86  
Release Floor ............................................83  
Release Floor from Participant..................87  
Request Floor ............................................83  
Restart .....................................................109  
Restore defaults.......................................215  
S
Screen Settings .......................................120  
Search .......................................................62  
Selfview .....................................................23  
SIP...........................................................203  
Snapshot..............................................78, 79  
Snapshot Source.....................................148  
Software Options.....................................125  
Start up Video Source .............................146  
Stereo I/O mode ......................................173  
Stereo speakers.......................................173  
Streaming ..................................................40  
System configuration.................................13  
System Information....................................96  
System Name ..........................................113  
T
Take Chair .................................................86  
Take new snapshot .............................78, 79  
Telephone Add-On ..................................235  
XGA ........................................................ 120  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Oven M Nr 09 786 840 User Manual
MTD Blower F5 F8 User Manual
NEC Computer Monitor MD213MG User Manual
NETGEAR Switch GSM7224R User Manual
Nortel Networks Telephone Modular ICS 40 User Manual
Omron Healthcare Blood Pressure Monitor 7300W User Manual
Palsonic CRT Television 6845PFST User Manual
Panasonic Car Video System BT LH900A User Manual
Panasonic Laptop CF 19CDBAXVM User Manual
Parker Hannifin Video Game Console P N88023735 01A User Manual